Page 1 6F2T0200 (Rev. 0.15) Instruction manual Multi functional protection IED GR-200 series (GRE200 -1 & -2 models)
Page 2 6F2T0200 (0.15) Safety Precautions Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully. This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood. Explanation of symbols used Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
Page 3 6F2T0200 (0.15) CAUTION •Earth The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed. CAUTION •Operating environment The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration. •Ratings Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to the equipment ratings.
Page 4 For further information in terms of the disposal, the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation (Toshiba ESS, Japan).
Page 5 We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice. •Copyright © Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2021. All rights reserved. •Registered Trademarks Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective...
Page 6 6F2T0200 (0.15) Contents Introduction ............................1 Relay applications......................... 2 Control and monitoring application ..................... 5 Monitoring and recording functions .................... 5 Hardware overview ........................6 Symbols used in logical diagrams ....................7 Abbreviation..........................11 Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID) ..........12 Relay application ..........................
Page 7 6F2T0200 (0.15) Reset Ratio ........................... 79 2.4.4 Miscellaneous functions ...................... 79 2.4.5 Setting for Petersen coil earthed system ................80 2.4.6 Setting of standby earth-fault ..................... 81 2.4.7 Scheme logic ........................81 2.4.8 Setting ..........................84 2.4.9 Signal ........................... 89 2.4.10 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) ..............
Page 8 6F2T0200 (0.15) Inrush current detection function (ICD) .................. 128 Operation and characteristic .................... 129 2.10.1 Scheme logic ........................129 2.10.2 Setting ..........................130 2.10.3 Signal ..........................130 2.10.4 Cold load protection (CLP) ....................... 131 Scheme logic ........................132 2.11.1 Setting ..........................134 2.11.2 Signal ..........................
Page 9 6F2T0200 (0.15) Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS) ..............177 Drop-off and pickup setting....................178 2.16.1 Delay for the operation of the OVS element ..............178 2.16.2 Time characteristic ......................178 2.16.3 Miscellaneous functions ....................180 2.16.4 Scheme logic ........................181 2.16.5 Setting ..........................
Page 10 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation for the CTF function ..................229 2.21.2 Scheme logic ........................229 2.21.3 Setting ..........................231 2.21.4 Signal ..........................232 2.21.5 Three-phase autoreclose (ARC) ....................233 Outline ..........................234 2.22.1 Terminology ........................235 2.22.2 Function block diagram ..................... 238 2.22.3 Autoreclosing logic ......................
Page 11 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting and operation ......................299 2.26.3 Scheme logic ........................304 2.26.4 Setting ..........................306 2.26.5 Signal ..........................307 2.26.6 Automatic transfer operation (ATO) ..................308 Scheme logic ........................309 2.27.1 ATO judgment ........................311 2.27.2 ATO special relays for commands ..................313 2.27.3 Setting ..........................
Page 12 6F2T0200 (0.15) Settings in LED logics ....................... 372 3.4.4 Mapping for IEC61850 communication ................374 3.4.5 Setting ..........................378 3.4.6 Signal ..........................379 3.4.7 Counter function for the general (GCNT) ................380 Counter setting for a signal ....................381 3.5.1 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes ..................
Page 13 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting ..........................485 4.1.8 Signal ..........................487 4.1.9 Software interlock function (ILK) .................... 490 ILK specification ........................ 491 4.2.1 Interlock-check formula ....................491 4.2.2 Interlock-check method ..................... 494 4.2.3 Configuration of Interlock formulae ................. 500 4.2.4 Signal ..........................501 4.2.5 Technical Description ........................
Page 14 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function keys........................561 5.7.4 Operation keys ........................564 5.7.5 Clock function ........................... 565 Clock setting ........................565 5.8.1 Selection of date and time formats ................... 565 5.8.2 Time Synchronization ....................... 566 5.8.3 Setting time zone ....................... 574 5.8.4 DST setting (Summer time setting)..................
Page 15 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setup for the event recorder ..................... 629 8.2.4 Setting ..........................630 8.2.5 Signal ..........................630 8.2.6 Disturbance recorder ........................ 631 Recording time and amount ....................631 8.3.1 Relays within disturbance recorder .................. 631 8.3.2 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena ..........633 8.3.3 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder ....
Page 16 6F2T0200 (0.15) Count information on the screen ..................666 9.6.1 Report setting for GCNT (Dead band feature) ..............666 9.6.2 Statistics data (Accumulated time)..................667 Statistics data (Motor Parameter group) ................. 667 Monitoring for miscellaneous functions ................... 668 Setting ............................669 Signal ............................
Page 17 6F2T0200 (0.15) Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error) ............710 10.2.30 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error) ..........711 10.2.31 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) ..........713 10.2.32 Aux. contacts monitoring (DPOS faulty or undefined) ..........714 10.2.33 Supervision of board connection (Board error) ............. 716 10.2.34 Other supervision tasks ......................
Page 18 6F2T0200 (0.15) Modbus functions....................... 803 11.4.7 How to manage Modbus data file ..................806 11.4.8 How to map IED signals to Modbus addresses ..............810 11.4.9 Setting ..........................817 11.4.10 Signal (Data ID) ......................818 11.4.11 IEC 60870-5-103 communication ..................... 819 Selection of IEC60870-5-103 protocol ................
Page 19 6F2T0200 (0.15) Cautions ............................ 921 Preparations ..........................922 Test operations .......................... 923 Test for communication ..................... 923 14.4.1 Test for relay application ....................924 14.4.2 Test for BI and BO circuits ....................925 14.4.3 Test for mode change (MDCTRL) ..................925 14.4.4 LED light test ........................
Page 20 6F2T0200 (0.15) Introduction Contents Pages Relay applications† Control and monitoring applications† Monitoring functions Recording functions Hardware overview Symbols used in logical diagrams Function identifies and signals (FB) Abbreviation —————————————————————————————————————————————— †The implementation of particular features is dependent upon a hardware structure and a software model and several IEDs do not support such features.
Page 21 6F2T0200 (0.15) GRE200—Multi function protection IED—has been designed for protection and control of low and medium voltage system. It can adapt to not only distribution lines and transmission lines but also versatile system, such as renewable energy system and railway application system. It has also been designed for extensive hardware and modular software combinations.
Page 22 6F2T0200 (0.15) the SOTF will have the protection for a certain period after the circuit breaker closes. [CBF] Circuit breaker failure protection The CBF is provided to clear the fault when an original circuit-breaker fails to operate. [UC] Under-current protection The UC has two relay elements.
Page 23 6F2T0200 (0.15) [FRQ] Frequency protection (Over frequency, under frequency, Δf) FRQ detects frequency deviation and issue an alarm between actual frequency and nominal frequency. [FL] Single-end fault locator When a fault is detected, the FL can determine distance between the IED and the fault point. [ARC] Auto-re-close function After tripping a circuit breaker (CB), the ARC can restore the service by closing the CB again.
Page 24 Monitoring and recording functions Using the HMI, the monitoring and metering functions can display status, settings, data and others. The user can also see information using “GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS)” both at local and remote end.
Page 25 6F2T0200 (0.15) Event record function: Events related to the IED operations will be memorized in the event record function. Disturbance record function: The start of disturbance recorder is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform recorded by this function using GR-TIEMS. Automatic supervision It supervises the health of IED hardware and protection applications during normal operation.
Page 26 6F2T0200 (0.15) Symbols used in logical diagrams Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows: Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and Mapping point 1. Marked with : Relay elements 2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows: A binary output (BO) circuit A LED circuit...
Page 27 6F2T0200 (0.15) Timer symbol (ii) Delay timer ➢ Delayed pick-up timer Fixed timer (XXX: Set time) Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range) XXX ─ YYY Delayed drop-off timer Fixed timer (XXX: Set time) Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range) XXX ─YYY One-shot timer ➢...
Page 28 6F2T0200 (0.15) Logic symbol (iii) AND gate ➢ Output & Output OR gate ➢ Output ≥1 Output XOR gate ➢ Output Output Signal inversion ➢ Output Output GRE200 (1,2) - 9 -...
Page 29 6F2T0200 (0.15) Flip-flop symbol (iv) Output No change Output Scheme switch Switch Output Output Switch Output Output GRE200 (1,2) - 10 -...
Page 30 Earth Fault Earthing Switch Engineering Workstation in the substation Global Positioning System GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software Human Machine Interface Intelligent Electronic Device IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
Page 31 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID) Signal symbols A function Block (FB) is one of software modules of the IED. Relay, control and communication applications are made of their FBs. Logical address of input and output is expressed with a signal number (i.e., function ID and element ID, or Data ID).
Page 32 6F2T0200 (0.15) Data Example Example Identifier texts Note length Function ID Element ID 2200001B6F 32-bits 400001 22 (First and second # of Element ID) 3200001B6F 32-bits 400001 32 (First and second # of Element ID) 4200001B6F 32-bits 400001 42 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 32 2300001B6F 64-bits...
Page 33 6F2T0200 (0.15) Relay application Contents Pages Pages Autoreclosing (ARC) Inrush current detection(ICD) -Blocking reclose in CBF -OC blocked by ICD -Blocking reclose in EF -RP blocked by ICD -Blocking reclose in OC -RQ blocked by ICD -Blocking reclose in OCN -SEF blocked by ICD -Blocking reclose in SEF -Operation and characteristics...
Page 34 6F2T0200 (0.15) Contents Pages Pages Pilot (carrier) scheme (DEFCAR) Thermal overload function (THM) -BOP by directional earth fault relay -Characteristics -POP by directional earth fault relay -State determination -UOP by directional earth fault relay Undercurrent protection (UC) Reverse power (REVPOW) -Pick-up thresholds -Active power protection (RP) Under-voltage function (UV)
Page 35 6F2T0200 (0.15) Overcurrent protection (OC) The phase overcurrent (OC) protection is the major protection function and has both time characteristic and directional elements. Four stages (elements) are available in the OC protection. The user can select various features using the scheme switches provided. The elements are named OC1, OC2, OC3, and OC4;...
Page 36 6F2T0200 (0.15) Relay polarity 2.1.1 The user can choose either non-directional OC or directional OC for each OC stage. In addition, the user can further select either the forward or the reverse direction for each of the directional OC elements selected. Characteristic of non-directional OC The characteristic of the non-directional type OC is a circle that has a center at the origin.
Page 37 6F2T0200 (0.15) current in the protected circuit, in this case the phase-A current (I ), is determined from the 90°. The purpose of using V angle measured for I against V in the 90° leading position 90°) takes the same direction as the phase-A voltage (V is so that the reference voltage (V because the directional-sensing element requires a reference quantity that is reasonably constant against which the current in the protected circuit can be compared.
Page 38 6F2T0200 (0.15) Phase difference calculation |V|•|I|cos(−) 0 & Output of 1 directional element & Amplitude calculation |l| OC pickup current Amplitude calculation |Vpol| Set voltage (OV-Vpol) Figure 2.1-3 Direction determination after loss of voltage memory If a single phase is connected to a heavy load, and the other phases are not connected to heavy loads, the user can program separately the directional OC element such that OC will send a trip signal only when the fault current detected is in the same direction among two phases or more of the three-phases.
Page 39 6F2T0200 (0.15) Characteristic of directional OC in the reverse direction (iii) The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the scheme switch, as well as the setting of the directional OC element in the forward direction, provides the setting of the directional OC element in the reverse direction: for example, Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir] when the direction of the OC on stage 1 is considered.
Page 40 6F2T0200 (0.15) Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic 2.1.2 The OC element monitors the currents; when one of the currents is beyond the threshold of operation, the OC element will operate within a period that is defined by the time characteristic feature.
Page 41 6F2T0200 (0.15) When definite time resetting is selected with the operation of the inverse time OC selection and the reset time set to zero (instantaneous), no intentional delay is added for the resetting: that is, when the energizing current falls below the reset threshold of the OC element, the OC element returns to its reset condition.
Page 42 6F2T0200 (0.15) DT characteristic (ii) The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The user can set the operate time using a setting;...
Page 43 6F2T0200 (0.15) Inverse; “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse; “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse; “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.) In the IDMT, the user can also program the characteristic using time-multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, when the IEC characteristic is selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [OC1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the default value for the TMS is 1.00).
Page 44 6F2T0200 (0.15) Time characteristic The user should set DT for the scheme switches [OC1-Timer]. The value of the required operate time is set for the setting [TOC1] in the range 0.00–300.00s. Instantaneous activation The operate time of the instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOC1], but the instantaneous one can also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)’...
Page 45 6F2T0200 (0.15) Note: For the setting [OC1-Rtimer]=DEF (definite-time-reset), the integrated value shall be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [OC1], when the small energized current is continued for timer setting [TOC1R]. The integrated value will not be zero when the energized current does not flow small for the setting [TOC1R].
Page 46 6F2T0200 (0.15) Time → Energizing current Energizing current cleared by tripping Pickup threshold in relay [OC1] threshold Measuring quantity Inverse-time-reset characteristic Stage to element return Setting [*-Rtimer]=DEP Integrator Trip signal The integration will be deceased depending on the [OC1-RTMS-*] reset characteristics. Definite-time-reset characteristic Stage to element return...
Page 47 6F2T0200 (0.15) Summary of OC operation (viii) Table 2.1-4 shows the summary of OC operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in IEC-NI, VI, EI and UK-LTI characteristics (†). Table 2.1-4 Type and standard board in the OC1 (A tick shows a selectable function) IDMT Characteristics IEC-NI...
Page 48 6F2T0200 (0.15) Application for motor protection 2.1.5 As the function of motor protection (MOT) will be provided independently (see Chapter 2.28), the user can have the motor protection using the OC function. The OC element can have relay calculation at the particular period, the timing of which can be selected from ‘Stop status’, ‘Start-up status’, and ‘Running status’...
Page 49 6F2T0200 (0.15) Miscellaneous functions 2.1.6 Trip mode Every OC element has a selectable tripping mode; the mode is selected using a scheme switch. For the OC1 element, for example, a scheme switch [OC1-OPMD] is provided. When a trip is required for any faults that are detected, 3POR (a fault occurs in one or more phases) is set for the scheme switch [OC1-OPMD].
Page 50 6F2T0200 (0.15) required, Block is set for the scheme switch [OC1-ARCBlk]. Block is set for the scheme switch [OC1-ARCBlk] as a default. Signal of OC trip When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, set Alarm for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor].
Page 51 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 2.1-7 Signal behaviors of PLC monitoring points ‘OC1-OR’ and ‘OC1PU-OR’ Setting [OC1_Timer] PLC monitoring points IEC-NT,VI,EI, UK-LTI, IEET-MI,VI,EI, US-CO2,CO8, ORIGINAL ○ ○ OC1-OR ○ ○ OC1PU-OR A pick-up signal is generated instantly when the element operates. ○ No signal due that the PU element is killed.
Page 52 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.1.8 OC_MV (Function ID: 440081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection scheme switch OC2-EN Off / On - OC2 protection scheme switch OC3-EN Off / On - OC3 protection scheme switch OC4-EN Off / On - OC4 protection scheme switch...
Page 53 6F2T0200 (0.15) OC_MV (Function ID: 440081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OC1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OC1 operation block by VTF OC1-OPMD 3POR / 2OUTOF3 - OC1 operation mode 3POR OC1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - OC1 used for trip or alarm Trip OC1-ARCBlk Non / Block...
Page 54 6F2T0200 (0.15) OC_MV (Function ID: 440081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OC2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OC2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 Output Non / Block-AllP / OC2-2fBlk - OC2 operation block by 2f-detection Block-PerP...
Page 55 6F2T0200 (0.15) OC_MV (Function ID: 440081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OC3-RTMS- OC3 dependent reset time multiplier of ORG 0.010 - 50.000 1.000 inverse curve OC3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC3 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OC3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC3 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OC3-c...
Page 56 6F2T0200 (0.15) OC_MV (Function ID: 440081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OC4-DPR 10 - 100 % OC4 drop-out/pick-up ratio OC4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - OC4 time multiplier of ORG inverse curve 1.000 OC4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC4 reset delay type of US TOC4R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC4 definite time reset delay...
Page 57 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.1.9 Signal monitoring points ◆ OC_MV (Function ID: 440081) Element ID Name Description 8100011B69 OC1-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OC1 protection operation 8200011B6A OC1-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by OC1 protection operation 8010011C60 OC1-CALC_ENABLE OC1 calculation Enable Flag 8000011A66 OC1-DEF-A OC1 phase_A def output 8000011A69...
Page 58 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring points ◆ OC_MV (Function ID: 440081) Element ID Name Description 8600021B64 OC2-OPT-C OC2 protection operated (phase-C) 8600021B67 OC2-OPT-CR OC2 protection operated (phase-C) 8100021B60 OC2-OR OC2 relay element operated (3-phases OR) 8400021C20 OC2-A OC2 relay element operated (phase-A) 8500021C21 OC2-B OC2 relay element operated (phase-B)
Page 59 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring points ◆ OC_MV (Function ID: 440081) Element ID Name Description 8000041A6A OC4-DEP-B OC4 phase_B dep output 8000041A68 OC4-DEF-C OC4 phase_C def output 8000041A6B OC4-DEP-C OC4 phase_C dep output 8300041BB0 OC4_BLOCK OC4 protection block command 8300041BB1 OC4_INST_OP OC4 protection instant operation command 8300041B68 OC4-OPT...
Page 60 6F2T0200 (0.15) Earth fault protection (EF) The earth fault protection (EF) function has four stages (elements); each element can have either a directional characteristic or non-directional characteristic. To simplify the description, only EF1 is discussed but is applicable to the other EFs; hence, read the expression for EF1 as EF2, EF3 and EF4 at each EF stage unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided.
Page 61 6F2T0200 (0.15) Relay polarity 2.2.1 The user can choose either non-directional EF or directional EF for each EF stage. In addition, the user can further select the forward or the reverse for each of the directional EF elements selected. Characteristic of non-directional EF The characteristic of the non-directional type EF function is a circle at the origin.
Page 62 6F2T0200 (0.15) (2.2-1) 3�� ≥ �� (2.2-2) 3�� × cos⁡(φ − |θ|) ≥ 0 (2.2-3) 3�� ≥ ��_�� where 3Io = residual current 3Vo = residual voltage −3Vo = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage) φ= lagging angle θ = EF setting angle = Setting value of the EF element ([EF1-DT] and the others) EF_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([EF1-Vpol]) Note: In the case of an internal fault, the phase angle is equal to the angle of the zero-...
Page 63 6F2T0200 (0.15) Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic 2.2.2 The EF element monitors the earth-fault currents; when one of the currents is beyond the threshold for the operation, the EF element will operate within a period that is defined by the time characteristic feature.
Page 64 6F2T0200 (0.15) where: t = operating time for constant current I (seconds), I = energizing current (amperes), Is = earth fault current setting (amperes), TMS = time multiplier setting, k, α, c = constants defining curve. The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are defined in Table 2.2-1. In addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied.
Page 65 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 2.2-3 IDMT Characteristics curves Operate time of DT (iv) The operate time in the DT is a constant. Time characteristic The user should set DT for the scheme switch [EF1-Timer]. The value of the required operate time is set for the setting [TEF1] in the range 0.00–300.00s. Instantaneous activation The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TEF1], but the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)”...
Page 66 6F2T0200 (0.15) defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151): (2.2-2) �� ( I ) = �� × [ β 1 − ( I I ⁄ ) where: t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds), I = energizing current (amperes), Is = threshold setting (amperes), kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is...
Page 67 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 2.2-4 Inverse-time-reset characteristics curves Figure 2.2-5 illustrates that an integrating value will be influenced dependent on the DEP or DEF setting. An energized quantity (I), where I is greater than a threshold setting [EF1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [EF1], the element operation will return to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (2.2-2).
Page 68 6F2T0200 (0.15) Reset time of DT (vi) In the DT characteristic, the reset time is designed to be instant. Summary of EF operation (vii) Table 2.2-3 shows a summary for EF operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in IEC-NI, VI, EI and UK-LTI characteristics (†).
Page 69 6F2T0200 (0.15) Miscellaneous functions 2.2.5 Blocking EF by ICD The operation of each EF element can be blocked if the ICD function detects a second harmonic current caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when a transformer is energized. For example, for the EF1 element, the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] is provided, and Block should be set when the user wishes to block the EF1 element when the second harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush is present.
Page 70 6F2T0200 (0.15) 8000011C23 EF1† 8000011C27 EF1PU† For DT characteristic TEF1 & To Grouping logic 8000011B60 & & For IDMT characteristic ≥1 EF1-OPT 0.00-300.00s EF1 PU & & ≥1 & & From ICD & EF1-OPT-TRIP EF1_Timer Trip ICD-OR & EF1-Usefor IEC-NI &...
Page 71 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.2.7 EF_MV (Function ID:441081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection scheme switch EF2-EN Off / On - EF2 protection scheme switch EF3-EN Off / On - EF3 protection scheme switch EF4-EN Off / On - EF4 protection scheme switch...
Page 72 6F2T0200 (0.15) EF_MV (Function ID:441081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note EF1-CTFBlk Non / Block - EF1 operation block by CTF EF1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - EF1 used for trip or alarm Trip EF1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose block by EF1 Block NonDir / Forward / EF2-Dir...
Page 73 6F2T0200 (0.15) EF_MV (Function ID:441081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note EF2-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose block by EF2 Block NonDir / Forward / EF3-Dir - EF3 directional characteristic NonDir Reverse Fwd/ EF3-Angle -90 - 90 deg EF3 directional characteristic angle EF3-Vpol 0.5 - 100.0 V EF3 polarizing voltage level...
Page 74 6F2T0200 (0.15) EF_MV (Function ID:441081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note NonDir / Forward / EF4-Dir - EF4 directional characteristic NonDir Reverse Fwd/ EF4-Angle -90 - 90 deg EF4 directional characteristic angle EF4-Vpol 0.5 - 100.0 V EF4 polarizing voltage level DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / UK-LTI / EF4-Timer...
Page 75 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.2.8 Signal monitoring point ◆ EF_MV (Function ID: 441081) Element ID Name Description 8500001B62 EF-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by EF protection 8400001B61 EF-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by EF protection 8300001B23 EF-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by EF protection 8000011C23 EF1 relay element operated 8200011B62 EF1-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by EF1 protection...
Page 76 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection point on PLC logic ◆ EF(Function ID: 441081) Element ID Name Description 800001EBB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command 800001EBB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instant operation command 810002EBB0 EF2_BLOCK EF2 protection block command 810002EBB1 EF2_INST_OP EF2 protection instant operation command 820003EBB0 EF3_BLOCK EF3 protection block command...
Page 77 6F2T0200 (0.15) Directional earth fault command protection (DEFCAR) Directional earth fault command protection (DEFCAR) provides POP, UOP and BOP schemes using two elements of earth fault protection between in forward and in reverse (DEFCF and DEFCR‡). POP, UOP and BOP can issue a three-phase trip (3P) command. The POP, UOP and BOP schemes also permit to operate the function of autoreclose (ARC†).
Page 78 6F2T0200 (0.15) Permissive overreach protection (POP) 2.3.1 DEFCAR sends a trip permission signal in POP; and POP does not send a trip permission signal for non-internal fault. Figure 2.3-1 shows POP scheme logic. The elements of OCD are used to select a phase that should be tripped in CB. When POP receives a trip permission signal, POP issues a trip signal on condition that DEFCF has operated.
Page 79 6F2T0200 (0.15) To CRL 8400001B68 TDEFCB From EF (EF2) DEFCR-X DEFCR & 0.00 to 0.30s 8300001B67 ≥1 DEFCF-X From VTF ≥1 To carrier send circuit VTF_DETECT From PROT COMMON DEFCAR-CS-A_POUP CB_LOSS_PHASE DEFCAR-CS-B_POUP DEFCAR-CS-C_POUP 8000001B74 & DEFCAR-OPT-AR 8100001B75 & DEFCAR-OPT-BR 8200001B76 &...
Page 80 6F2T0200 (0.15) TREBK-DEF 8000001B69 DEFCF-X & DEF-REVBLK ≥1 0.02s 0.00 —10.00s DEFCR-X Figure 2.3-3 Current reversal logic From PROT COMMON UVLG-A & WKIT-A_CONDITION ≥1 UVLG-B WKIT-B_CONDITION & ≥1 UVLG-C ≥1 WKIT-C_CONDITION & ≥1 ≥1 UVLS-AB UVLS-BC TWICOORD UVLS-CA & DEAL_LINE_DEDTECT 0.000 to 0.100 s Figure 2.3-4 UVL for WKIT operation TDEFC...
Page 81 6F2T0200 (0.15) Permission signals received: 8000001B6D & From Terminal 1 DEF-ECHO_CS-A ≥1 800000EB55 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A ≥1 & 0.05s 0.2s 810000EB56 INT.DEFCAR-R1-B ≥1 & 8100001B6F 820000EB57 INT.DEFCAR-R1-C & DEF-ECHO_CS-B ≥1 ≥1 & 0.05s 0.2s 8200001B6F & DEF-ECHO_CS-C From Terminal 2 ≥1 & 840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A 0.05s 0.2s...
Page 82 6F2T0200 (0.15) To CRL 8400001B68 TDEFCB From EF (EF2) DEFCR-X DEFCR & 0.00 to 0.30s From VTF 8300001B67 ≥1 DEFCF-X ≥1 VTF_DETECT From PROT COMMON CB_LOSS_PHASE From EF (EF1) TDEFCF 8000001B64 DEFCF-AX DEFCF & & From PROT-COMMON 8100001B65 & DEFCF-BX &...
Page 83 6F2T0200 (0.15) DEF-REVBLK & 8000001B79 & INT.DEFCAR-S-A & 8100001B7A & INT.DEFCAR-S-B 8200001B7B & & INT.DEFCAR-S-C TSBCT-DEF DEFCAR-OPT-A DEFCAR-OPT-B ≥1 DEFCAR-OPT-C 8F00001B7C ≥1 800000EB55 DEFCAR_F.BLOCK & & DEFCAR-S 810000EB56 DEFCAR_PERMIT DEFCAR Figure 2.3-10 Sending circuit of BOP GRE200 (1,2) - 64 -...
Page 84 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.3.4 CARRIER_COMMON (Function ID: 438001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Carrier_COM CAR-CHNUM 2-TERM / 3-TERM - Carrier scheme terminal number 2-TERM TCARECCB 0.00 - 200.00 s Echo enable timer from CB opened 0.10 TWICOORD 0.000 - 0.100 s Time coordination for UV relay operation 0.000 CARRIER_DEF (Function ID: 437001)
Page 85 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.3.5 Signal monitoring point ◆ CARRIER_COMMON (Function ID: 438001) Element ID Name Description 8000001BB0 CAR_BLOCK Carrier block signal 8000001B67 CH1-USE Channel 1 use 8100001B68 CH2-USE Channel 2 use 8400001B64 ECH01_CONDITION Echo1 condition 8500001B65 ECH02_CONDITION Echo2 condition 8000001B61 WKIT-A_CONDITION Weak infeed trip A phase condition 8100001B62...
Page 86 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ CARRIER_DEF (Function ID: 437001) Element ID Name Description 8000001B69 DEF-REVBLK 8100001B78 DEFCAR-ARC-BLOCK ARC block signal by DEF carrier 8100001BC1 DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK ARC block signal by DEF carrier 8000001BC2 DEFCAR_F.BLOCK Blocked DEF carrier send 8000001BC0 DEFCAR_3PTP DEF Carrier 3 phase trip 8400001B68 DEFCR-X...
Page 87 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ CARRIER_DEF (Function ID: 437001) Element ID Name Description 8000001B6D DEF-ECHO_CS-A ECHO carrier send (A phase) 8100001B6E DEF-ECHO_CS-B ECHO carrier send (B phase) 8200001B6F DEF-ECHO_CS-C ECHO carrier send (C phase) 8000001BBE DEF-ECHO BLOCK Echo function blocked 8000001B60 EXT.DEFCAR-R1 External DEF carrier received from remote 1...
Page 88 6F2T0200 (0.15) Sensitive earth fault protection (SEF) If an earth fault occurs, a sensitive earth fault (SEF) function is appropriate in which a fault current flows very small, in which case there is a distribution system earthed with a high- impedance.
Page 89 6F2T0200 (0.15) Relay polarity 2.4.1 The user can choose either non-directional SEF or directional SEF for each SEF stage. In addition, the user can further select either the forward or the direction for each of the directional SEF elements selected. Characteristic of non-directional SEF The characteristic of the non-directional type SEF function is a circle at the origin.
Page 90 6F2T0200 (0.15) ) for stage 1 with the setting [SEF1] when the scheme switch [SEF1-Dir]=Forward. Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [SEF1-Angle] with the value of θ set in the range of -90 – 90°. Figure 2.4-2 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic using the θ. The operation of the SEF element is based upon the following equation.
Page 91 6F2T0200 (0.15) Forward Forward Directional characteristic Directional characteristic Operation zone Operation zone angle line angle line θ= +60° θ= +90° Vpol Vpol Reverse Operation zone Reverse Reverse Operation zone Operation zone Vpol θ= +60° θ= +90° Directional characteristic θ= 0° angle line Reverse Reverse...
Page 92 6F2T0200 (0.15) DT characteristic The DT operates time characteristic is a constant one and will not be affected by the level of energizing current. The reset time is set to be zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The user can have time settings discussed in section (iv). IDMT characteristic (ii) The IDMT operate-time characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the energizing...
Page 93 6F2T0200 (0.15) (TMS) for the required operate time. The value of TMS is set for a characteristic: for example, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [SEF1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the [SEF1-TMS-UK], [SEF1- TMS-IEEE], [SEF1-TMS-US] and [SEF1-TMS-ORG].
Page 94 6F2T0200 (0.15) Time characteristic The user should set DT for the scheme switch [SEF1-Timer]. The value of the required operate time is set for the setting [TSEF1] in the range 0.00–300.00s. Instantaneous activation The operate time of the instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TEF1], but the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)”...
Page 95 6F2T0200 (0.15) Reset time for IDMT Programming the reset time characteristic is available for the IEEE standard, US standard and original (user-programmable) dependent time characteristic†. In the IEEE standard, for example, the user can set DEP for scheme switch [SEF1-Rtimer]. The following equation defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref.
Page 96 6F2T0200 (0.15) shall be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [SEF1], when the small energized current is continued for timer setting [T SEF1R]. The integrated value will not be zero when the energized current does not flow small for the setting [T SEF1R].
Page 97 6F2T0200 (0.15) Time → Energizing current Energizing current cleared by tripping [SEF1] threshold Pickup threshold in relay Measuring quantity Inverse-time-reset characteristic Stage to element return Setting [*-Rtimer]=DEP Integrator Trip signal The integration will be deceased depending on the [SEF1-RTMS-*] reset characteristics. Definite-time-reset characteristic Stage to element return...
Page 98 6F2T0200 (0.15) Summary of SEF operation (vii) Table 2.4-3 shows a summary for SEF operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in IEC-NI, VI, EI and UK-LTI characteristics (†). Table 2.4-3 Type and standard board in the SEF1 (A tick represents a selectable function) IDMT Characteristics IEC-NI...
Page 99 6F2T0200 (0.15) harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush is present. Non is set for the scheme switch [SEF1-2fBlk] as the default setting. For more information about the ICD function, see Chapter 2.10. Blocking SEF by VTF (ii) The operation of the SEF element can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF) function via a scheme switch.
Page 100 6F2T0200 (0.15) SEF1 element in the forward characteristic Margin=2.5° (fixed) Non-operation zone Operation zone SEF-Vpol (Ve180°) Setting [SEF1-Angle] = -45° 8000011C23 TSEF1 8000011B60 Angle line SEF1-OPT & & SEF1 0.00-300.00s SEF1-EN RP1 element in the forward characteristic Setting [RP1] = 2 watt Non-operation zone Operation zone SEF-Vpol (Ve180°)
Page 101 6F2T0200 (0.15) in Figure 2.4-7; Figure 2.4-8 shows grouping commands for the trip circuit (TRC). The SEF1 signal is generated when the pickup current exceeds a threshold, and then trip signals are injected into the TRC. (For more information, see Chapter 2.23) RPRRY ON RPFRY ON From ICD...
Page 102 6F2T0200 (0.15) From SEF1 to SEF4 logics To TRC SEF1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 SEF-OPT-TRIP SEF1S2-OPT-TRIP SEF2-OPT-TRIP SEF3-OPT-TRIP SEF4-OPT-TRIP SEF1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 SEF-OPT-ALARM SEF1S2-OPT-ALARM SEF2-OPT- ALARM SEF3-OPT- ALARM SEF4-OPT- ALARM SEF1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 SEF-ARC-BLOCK SEF2- ARC-BLOCK SEF3- ARC-BLOCK SEF4- ARC-BLOCK Figure 2.4-8 Grouping logic for TRC GRE200 (1,2) - 83 -...
Page 103 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.4.9 SEF_MV (Function ID: 442081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note SEF1 SEF1-EN Off / On - SEF1 protection enable SEF1 Directio NonDir / Forward / SEF1-Dir - SEF1 selection of protection direction Reverse Pol. SEF1-Angle -90 - 90 deg SEF1 polarizing angle in directional element SEF1-Vpol...
Page 104 6F2T0200 (0.15) SEF_MV (Function ID: 442081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OUTPUT SEF1-2fBlk Non / Block - SEF1 operation block by 2f-detection SEF1-VTFBlk Non / Block - SEF1 operation block by VTF SEF1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - SEF1 used for trip or alarm Trip SEF1-ARCBlk Non / Block...
Page 105 6F2T0200 (0.15) SEF_MV (Function ID: 442081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note SEF2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - SEF2 reset delay type of ORG Rtimer TSEF2R 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF2 definite time reset delay 0.00 SEF2-RTMS- SEF2 dependent reset time multiplier of 0.010 - 50.000 1.000 Original inverse curve...
Page 106 6F2T0200 (0.15) SEF_MV (Function ID: 442081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note SEF3-TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - SEF3 time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1.000 SEF3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - SEF3 reset delay type of ORG Rtimer TSEF3R 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF3 definite time reset delay 0.00 SEF3-RTMS-...
Page 107 6F2T0200 (0.15) SEF_MV (Function ID: 442081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note SEF4 0.001 - 1.000 A SEF4 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.010 SEF4-DPR 10 - 100 % SEF4 drop-out/pick-up ratio SEF4-TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - SEF4 time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1.000 SEF4-Rtimer DEF / DEP...
Page 108 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.4.10 Signal monitoring point ◆ SEF_MV (Function ID: 442081) Element ID Name Description 8400001B61 SEF-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by SEF protection 8100011B61 SEF1-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by SEF1 protection 8100021B61 SEF2-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by SEF2 protection 8100011B67 SEF1S2-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by SEF2 stage2 protection 8100031B61 SEF3-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by SEF3 protection...
Page 109 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ SEF_MV (Function ID: 442081) Element ID Name Description 8300041B63 SEF4_BLOCK SEF4 protection block command 8300041B64 SEF4_INST_OP SEF4 protection instant operation command 8300041B60 SEF4-OPT SEF4 protection operated 8300041C23 SEF4 SEF4 relay element operated 8300041C27 SEF4PU SEF4 relay operation level pick up 8300001B23 SEF-OPT-TRIP...
Page 110 6F2T0200 (0.15) Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) Negative-sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) function has both time characteristic and directional elements. Four stages (elements) are available in the OCN function. The user can select various features using the scheme switches provided. The elements are named OCN1, OCN2, and others;...
Page 111 6F2T0200 (0.15) Reverse Forward Directional characteristic Operation zone Operation zone angle line φ +θ Polarizing voltage (-3V Polarizing voltage (-3V -θ φ Directional characteristic Forward Reverse angle line Operation zone Operation zone Characteristic of the directional-OCN element in the forward direction Figure 2.5-1 Note: Directional characteristic angle (θ) forms the angle between the reference quantity and the directional characteristic angle line.
Page 112 6F2T0200 (0.15) 90°. The θ of OCN can be set from -90° to 90°. The minimum voltage necessary to maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to 180 V. Forward Forward Directional characteristic Directional characteristic Operation zone Operation zone angle line angle line θ= +60°...
Page 113 6F2T0200 (0.15) element using scheme switches. We shall see the scheme switches later. DT characteristic The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time; it is not affected by the level of the negative-sequence current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately.
Page 114 6F2T0200 (0.15) Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse, “US-CO8” for US CO8 inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic. In the IDMT operation, the user can also program the characteristic using time- multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time.
Page 115 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 2.5-3 IDMT Characteristics curves Operate time of DT (iv) The operate time in the DT is a constant. Time characteristic The user should set DT for the scheme switch [OCN1-Timer]. The value of the required operate time is set for the setting [TOCN1] in the range 0.00–300.00s. Instantaneous activation The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOCN1], but the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal “1 (High)”...
Page 116 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 2.5-2 Constants for inverse-time-reset characteristics Curve Type β Curve Description IEC 60255-151 (sec) IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI‡) IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI‡) IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI‡) UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI‡) IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1...
Page 117 6F2T0200 (0.15) energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [OCN1], the element operation will return to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (2.5-5). Time → Energizing current Energizing current cleared by tripping [OCN1] threshold Pickup threshold in relay Measuring quantity Inverse-time-reset characteristic Stage to element...
Page 118 6F2T0200 (0.15) IDMT Characteristics IEC-NI IEC-VI IEC-EI UK-LTI IEEE-MI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-CO2 US-CO8 Original ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Threshold value 2.5.3 The value of threshold current at which the OCN (I 2 ) element will pick-up is configured by settings;...
Page 119 6F2T0200 (0.15) Blocking OCN by CTF (iii) The operation of the OCN element can be blocked by the current transformer failure (CTF) function via a scheme switch. For example, Block should be set for the scheme switch [OCN1- CTFBlk] to block the operation of the OCN1 element during a CTF condition. Non is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-CTFBlk] as a default.
Page 120 6F2T0200 (0.15) characteristic defined with setting [OCN1_Timer], as shown in Table 2.5-4. Table 2.5-4 Signal behaviors of PLC monitoring points ‘OCN1’ and ‘OCN1PU’ Setting [OCN1_Type] PLC monitoring points IEC-NT,VI,EI, UK-LTI, IEET-MI,VI,EI, US-CO2,CO8, ORIGINAL ○ ○ OCN1 ○ ○ OCN1PU ○ A pick-up signal is generated instantly when the element operates.
Page 121 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.5.7 OCN_MV (Function ID:443081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OCN1-EN Off / On - OCN1 protection scheme switch OCN2-EN Off / On - OCN2 protection scheme switch OCN3-EN Off / On - OCN3 protection scheme switch OCN4-EN Off / On - OCN4 protection scheme switch...
Page 122 6F2T0200 (0.15) OCN_MV (Function ID:443081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OCN1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 Output OCN1-2fBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by 2f-detection OCN1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by VTF...
Page 123 6F2T0200 (0.15) OCN_MV (Function ID:443081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OCN2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 Output OCN2-2fBlk...
Page 124 6F2T0200 (0.15) OCN_MV (Function ID:443081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OCN3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN3 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN3 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN3 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000...
Page 125 6F2T0200 (0.15) OCN_MV (Function ID:443081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OCN4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN4 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN4 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN4 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OCN4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000...
Page 126 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.5.8 Signal monitoring point ◆ OCN_MV(Function ID: 443081) Element ID Name Description 8400001B61 OCN-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN protection 8100011B61 OCN1-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN1 protection 8100021B61 OCN2-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN2 protection 8100031B61 OCN3-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN3 protection 8100041B61 OCN4-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN4 protection...
Page 127 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection point on PLC logic ◆ OCN_MV (Function ID: 443081) Element ID Name Description 800001EBB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command 800001EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command 810002EBB0 OCN2_BLOCK OCN2 protection block command 810002EBB1 OCN2_INST_OP OCN2 protection instant operation command 820003EBB0 OCN3_BLOCK OCN3 protection block command...
Page 128 6F2T0200 (0.15) Undercurrent protection (UC) Undercurrent protection (UC) is provided per phase and is used to detect a decrease in current caused by a loss of load. The UC protection consists of two independent stages—stage 1 (UC1) and stage 2 (UC2). Each stage is provided for all phases and employs a definite time delay programmed.
Page 129 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation and characteristic 2.6.1 Each stage of the UC protection will operate when a current is under a threshold level, as illustrated in Figure 2.6-1(a). The threshold levels of the UC protection are set by using settings [UC1] or [UC2]. The operation of the UC protection, however, is blocked as the current falls below 0.04A of the CT secondary, below which the loss of load cannot be distinguished from that of a trip operation performed by other protective functions.
Page 130 6F2T0200 (0.15) ≥1 UC1-OR 8000011C20 8014001001 TUC1 & 8100011C21 & & UC1-OPT-A & 8114011001 & 8200011C22 & & UC1-OPT-B & 8214021001 & UC1-OPT-C & & & UC1-EN 0.00-300.00s 8000011B64 I>Iset UC1-OPT ≥1 & UC1-OPT-TRIP I<0.04A Trip UC1-UseFor UC1-OPT-ALARM & Alarm From CTF CTF_DETECT &...
Page 131 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.6.4 UC_MV (Function ID: 450081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note UC1-EN Off / On - UC1 protection enable UC2-EN Off / On - UC2 protection enable 0.10 - 10.00 A UC1 threshold 0.20 TUC1 0.00 - 300.00 s UC1 operating delay time 1.00 Output...
Page 132 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.6.5 Signal monitoring point ◆ UC_MV (Function ID: 450081) Element ID Name Description 8400001B64 UC-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by UC protection 8800001B60 UC-A_I<0.04A UC relay operation level pick up (phase-A) 8900001B61 UC-B_I<0.04A UC relay operation level pick up (phase-B) 8A00001B62 UC-C_I<0.04A UC relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
Page 133 6F2T0200 (0.15) Switch on to fault (SOTF-OC) The switch-onto-fault function (SOTF-OC) is used to detect, and rapidly clear faults when circuit breakers (CBs) is going to close onto a pre-existing fault in the protected zone. If a circuit breaker has closed onto a permanent fault, the memory circuit in the IED will be unable to memorize the voltage data required to retain the pre-fault values.
Page 134 6F2T0200 (0.15) 800000EBB1 OC-RTP.EN & From ARC To TRC 8300001B23 SHOT_MULTI SOTFOC-TRIP ≥1 8000001B60 ≥1 SOTFOC-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 8000011C20 & 8800011B62 & 8100011C21 & SOTFOC-OPT-A OCSOTF & 8900011B63 & 8200011C22 & SOTFOC-OPT-B & & 8A00011B64 & SOTFOC-OPT-C From ICD ICD-A ≥1 &...
Page 135 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.7.2 SOTFOC_MV(Function ID: 454081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note SOTFOC-EN Off / On - SOTF-OC protection enable OCSOTF 0. 02 - 15.00 A OC relay for SOTF threshold 1.20 Non / Block-AllP / OCSOTF-2fBlk - OCSOTF operation block by 2f-detection Block-PerP Test tool (Function ID: 454081) Item...
Page 136 6F2T0200 (0.15) Broken conductor protection (BCD) A series fault or an open circuit fault can be caused by circuit breaker contact failure, the operation of fuses, and false operation of single-phase switchgear. IEC60050 defines a series fault as having impedances in each of three-phases that are not equal; hence, the series fault is typified by the interruption of one or two phases, as a rule.
Page 137 6F2T0200 (0.15) Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault 2.8.1 Figure 2.8-1 shows the sequence diagram of the network connection when a single-phase series fault occurs. We can represent the series fault by the positive sequence, negative sequence and zero sequence impedances; the impedances are distributed to the left and right as shown in the diagram of the primary circuit below.
Page 138 6F2T0200 (0.15) From Equation (2.8-1), (2.8-2), and (2.8-3), the following equations are derived: �� + �� (2.8-4) �� ( �� − �� 1�� 1�� 1�� + �� + �� −�� (2.8-5) ( �� − �� 2��...
Page 139 6F2T0200 (0.15) Characteristic and setting 2.8.2 The hatched area of Figure 2.8-2 illustrates the BCD characteristic; the BCD function will operate when the positive sequence current (I1) is larger than 0.04×In, the negative sequence current (I2) is larger than 0.01×In, and the ratio |I | is higher than setting [BCD].
Page 140 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scheme logic 2.8.4 Figure 2.8-3 shows the scheme logic for the BCD function. The BCD function issues a trip signal through a delayed pick-up timer, the value of which is set for [TBCD]. The operation of the BCD function can be disabled using scheme switch [BCD-EN] Off. 8000001C23 From ICD &...
Page 141 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.8.5 Setting of BCD_MV (Function ID: 452081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note BCD-EN Off / On - BCD protection scheme switch 0.10 - 1.00 - BCD relay operating value (I2/I1) 0.20 TBCD 0.00 - 300.00 s BCD operating delay time 1.00 Output...
Page 142 6F2T0200 (0.15) Thermal overload function (THM) Apparatus such as cables, transformers, generators and others can become overheated when overloaded beyond their respective design limits due to excessive demands being placed on the system. The thermal overload function (THM) works by determining the temperature rise in an item of primary equipment by monitoring the current in order to detect the thermal overload of the apparatus.
Page 143 6F2T0200 (0.15) Thermal state determination 2.9.1 THM simulates the change of thermal state using an algorithm; THM can detect an overload condition. Thermal state (θ) is determined with the following equation: �� −�� τ ⁄ (2.9-1) θ = (1 − �� ) ×...
Page 144 6F2T0200 (0.15) Thermal characteristic 2.9.2 THM characteristics are determined with two equations. Equation (2.9-3) is used to define the cold state. Equation (2.9-4) is used to define the hot state: �� (2.9-3) t = τ ∙ Ln [ �� − �� ...
Page 145 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scheme logic 2.9.3 Figure 2.9-2 shows the scheme logic for THM. THM has two thresholds; threshold “A” is used for alarming, threshold “T” for tripping. The name of the output signal for the alarm is termed THM-OPT-ALARM and that of the output signal for tripping is termed “THM-OPT-TRIP”. The threshold level for the alarm is set using setting [THM-Alarm] as a percentage of the tripping threshold.
Page 146 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.9.4 THM_MV (Function ID: 451081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note THM-EN Off / On - Thermal protection scheme switch 0.40 - 10.00 A Thermal overload current 1.00 TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 Thermal time constant 10.0 TTHM-rad 0.5 - 500.0 Thermal time constant...
Page 147 6F2T0200 (0.15) Inrush current detection function (ICD) When a current transformer (CT) is first energized, an inrush current flows into the CT transiently to establish the magnetic field. The magnitude of the inrush current can greater than the full load current so much; thus, the protection function can issue trip signals falsely. That is, the inrush current is required to detect and the protection functions shall not operate during CT energizing.
Page 148 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation and characteristic 2.10.1 The ICD function examines the ratio of a second harmonic current (I2f) to the fundamental current (I1f) in each phase. If the ratio | I is larger than the setting [ICD-2f], the ICD | | I ⁄...
Page 149 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.10.3 ICD_MV (Function ID: 480081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note ICD-EN Off / On - ICD function scheme switch ICD-2f 10 - 50 % Sensitivity of 2f ICD-OC 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold of fundamental current 0.50 Signal 2.10.4...
Page 150 6F2T0200 (0.15) Cold load protection (CLP) The function of cold load protection (CLP) can have a number of disparate groups for setting. The CLP can switch a group setting from one operation to another operation at which protection functions in the IED are required to shift their settings from steady state to particular state.
Page 151 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scheme logic 2.11.1 State transition diagram and scheme logic are shown in Figure 2.11-1 and Figure 2.11-2. It should be noted that the scheme logic requires two binary inputs: circuit breaker (CB) OPEN and circuit breaker (CB) CLOSED. Under the normal operation, where the CB is closed, the CLP stays in STATE 0, and the OC operates with a normal setting group.
Page 152 6F2T0200 (0.15) STATE 0 CB status: Closed Settings: Normal Monitor CB status CB opens CB closes within T CLE time STATE 1 CB status: Open Settings: Normal Run T CLE timer <ICLDO for Monitor CB status T CLR timer T CLDO time expires T CLE timer expires...
Page 153 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.11.2 CLP_MV (Function ID: 481081) at Common tree Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note CLP-EN Off / On - Cold load protection scheme switch Group1 / Group2 / Group3 / Group4 / CLP-SG - Applied setting group at cold load mode Group1 Group5 / Group6 / Group7 / Group8...
Page 154 6F2T0200 (0.15) Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) When a circuit breaker (CB) fails to remove a fault because of the CB failing to open, the function of circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) is to remove the fault by the back-tripping of other CBs.
Page 155 6F2T0200 (0.15) CBF operation and its elements 2.12.1 The operation of CBF is initiated by the operation of OCCBF and EFCBF, which monitors fault current after the issuance of a trip command by other protection functions. OCCBF or EFCBF monitor the fault current so that the CBF feature can determine the failure of the CB to operate. For CBF, the respective phase currents in three-phase system are monitored by the OCCBF- A, OCCBF-B and OCCBF-C elements, while the zero-sequence current is monitored by the EFCBF element.
Page 156 6F2T0200 (0.15) One of the benefits of the “re-trip” function is that it can used to avoid accidental tripping of an adjacent CB or an upstream CB. This is particularly requisite during maintenance and testing of the system. Retrip Backup feature 2.12.3 Normal trip As cited above, “re-trip”...
Page 157 6F2T0200 (0.15) fault in response to the “re-trip” command, OCCBF and EFCBF would reset and the CBF sequence is stopped. If the target CB were to fail to remove the fault with the “re-trip” command, and if OCCBF or EFCBF continued to operate and if the timer #2 were to time out in accordance with the setting time applied [TCBF-TP], CBF will issue a trip command to the adjacent CB(s) to clear the fault, as a last resort.
Page 158 6F2T0200 (0.15) CBF_START-A CBF_START-B CBF_START-C 8000011C20 TCBF-RE OCCBF & CBF_RETRIP-A & ≥1 ○ & 8100011C21 ≥1 ≥1 & CBF_RETRIP-B ≥1 & & 8200011C22 ≥1 ≥1 & CBF_RETRIP-C ≥1 & & ≥1 ≥1 OCCBF-EN 0.000-300.000s 8400011C27 & ≥1 CBF_RETRIP EFCBF & &...
Page 159 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation timing 2.12.5 The OCCBF and EFCBF elements can check that the target CB has opened normally and that the fault current has disappeared completely. Because load current is usually present, the OCCBF and EFCBF settings should be account for between 10% and 200% of the rated current. The time settings [TCBF-RE] and [TCBF-TP] are determined in relation to the opening time of the target CB and the reset time of the OCCBF or EFCBF elements (see Toc and Tcb in Figure 2.12-1).
Page 160 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.12.6 CBF_MV (Function ID: 453081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note CBF-EN Off / On - CBF protection scheme switch OCCBF-EN Off / On - Current flow is judged by OC relay operation OCCBF relay operating level (Current flow OCCBF 0.10 - 25.00 1.00...
Page 161 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.12.7 Signal monitoring points ◆ CBF_MV (Function ID: 453081) Element ID Name Description 8100011BB5 CBF-RE_INST CBF1 instantaneously retrip 8200011BB6 CBF-TP_INST CBF1 instantaneously trip 8000011BB4 CBF_BLOCK CBF1 protection block command 8300011B23 CBF_RETRIP OCCBF1 Retrip 8000011B20 CBF_RETRIP-A OCCBF1 Retrip (phase-A) 8100011B21 CBF_RETRIP-B OCCBF1 Retrip (phase-B)
Page 162 6F2T0200 (0.15) Under-voltage protection for phase-to-natural (UV) The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-earth (UV) consists of four stages (elements) independently: UV1 to UV4. The time characteristic of the UV element is configured either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) using settings. Each UV stage (element) detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-earth.
Page 163 6F2T0200 (0.15) Drop-off and pick-up characteristic 2.13.1 Figure 2.13-1 shows the UV characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The pick- up threshold voltage (PU) is represented the outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO) is represented the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UV1 element is set using [UV1]. The DO voltage of the UV1 element is set using [UV1-DPR].
Page 164 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting pick-up operation The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UV1 element is required inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is illustrated in Figure 2.13-2 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UV1-TMS]. It is followed to Equation (2.13-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127 ��...
Page 165 6F2T0200 (0.15) operation time. The UV1 element has a time counter that increases in response to the fault occurrence and duration. This figure also shows the increment degree of the time counter for the fault occurrences. As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter does not reach the trip level.
Page 166 6F2T0200 (0.15) UV trip signal (ii) The UV1 element issues a trip command for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme switch [UV1-UseFor] as the normal tripping. However, when an alarm signal in place of the trip command is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [UV1-UseFor]. †Note: For more information about tripping, see Chapter 2.23.
Page 167 6F2T0200 (0.15) 8000011B20 To grouping logic TUV1 8000011B62 & & & UV1-OPT-A 8100011B21 ≥1 8100011B63 & & 8200011B22 & UV1-OPT-B ≥1 8200011B64 & & & UV1-OPT-C ≥1 8000011B60 ≥1 0.00 to 300.00s 8000011B65 UV1-OPT & 8000011B24 ≥1 8100011B25 & 8000011B23 UV1 PU 8200011B26 &...
Page 168 6F2T0200 (0.15) From UV1 to UV4 logics To TRC UV1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 UV-OPT-TRIP UV2-OPT-TRIP UV3-OPT-TRIP UV4-OPT-TRIP UV1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 UV-OPT-ALARM UV2-OPT- ALARM UV3-OPT- ALARM UV4-OPT- ALARM UV-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 UV-OPT-AR UV1-OPT-AR UV-OPT-BR UV1-OPT-BR UV-OPT-CR UV1-OPT-CR UV2-OPT-AR ≥1 UV2-OPT-BR UV2-OPT-CR UV3-OPT-AR ≥1 UV3-OPT-BR UV3-OPT-CR UV4-OPT-AR UV4-OPT-BR UV4-OPT-CR...
Page 169 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.13.5 Setting of UV_MV (Function ID: 470181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note UVBLK Off / On - Operation canceled when UVBLK operated UVBLK 10.0 V Threshold of UVBLK element 10.0 TUVBLK 10.00 S UVBLK operation delay timer 10.00 UV1-EN Off / On...
Page 170 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of UV_MV (Function ID: 470181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note TUV4 0.00 - 300.00 s UV4 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 IDMT 5.0 - 130.0 V UV4 threshold 60.0 UV4-DPR 100 - 120 % UV4 drop-out/pick-up ratio UV4-TMS 0.010 - 100.000...
Page 171 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.13.6 Signal monitoring point ◆ UV_MV (Function ID: 470181) Element ID Name Description 8000001BB0 CB_APH_OPEN Circuit Breaker detection (phase-A) 8100001BB1 CB_BPH_OPEN Circuit Breaker detection (phase-B) 8200001BB2 CB_CPH_OPEN Circuit Breaker detection (phase-C) 8800001B65 UV-OPT-A UV protection operated (phase-A) 8400001B64 UV-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by UV protection operation...
Page 172 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ UV_MV (Function ID: 470181) Element ID Name Description 8400021C24 UV2PU-A UV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A) 8500021C25 UV2PU-B UV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B) 8600021C26 UV2PU-C UV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C) 8100021B61 UV2PU-OR UV2 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
Page 173 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection point in PLC logic ◆ UV_MV (Function ID: 470181) Element ID Name Description 800001EBB0 UV1_BLOCK UV1 protection block command 810002EBB0 UV2_BLOCK UV2 protection block command 820003EBB0 UV3_BLOCK UV3 protection block command 830004EBB0 UV4_BLOCK UV4 protection block command 800000EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN Circuit Breaker detection (phase-A)
Page 174 6F2T0200 (0.15) Phase-to-phase under-voltage protection (UVS) The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-phase (UVS) consists of four stages (elements) independently: UVS1 to UVS4. The time characteristic of the UVS element is configured either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) using settings. Each UVS element detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-phase.
Page 175 6F2T0200 (0.15) Drop-off and pick-up characteristic 2.14.1 Figure 2.14-1 shows the UVS characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The pick- up threshold voltage (PU) is represented the outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO) is represented the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UVS1 element is set using [UVS1]. The DO voltage of the UVS1 element is set using [UVS1-DPR].
Page 176 6F2T0200 (0.15) Pick-up characteristic The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UVS1 element is required inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is illustrated in Figure 2.14-2 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UV1-TMS]. It is followed to Equation (2.14-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127 ��...
Page 177 6F2T0200 (0.15) operation time. The UVS1 element has a time counter that increases in response to the fault occurrence and duration. This figure also shows the increment degree of the time counter for the fault occurrences. As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter does not reach the trip level.
Page 178 6F2T0200 (0.15) failure. UVS trip signal (ii) The UVS1 element issues a trip command for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme switch [UVS1-UseFor] as the normal tripping. However, when an alarm signal in place of the trip command is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [UVS1-UseFor].
Page 179 6F2T0200 (0.15) 8000011B20 To grouping logic TUVS1 8000011B62 & & & UVS1-OPT-AB 8100011B21 ≥1 8100011B63 UVS1 & & 8200011B22 & UVS1-OPT-BC ≥1 8200011B64 & & & UVS1-OPT-CA ≥1 8000011B60 ≥1 0.00 to 300.00s 8000011B65 & UVS1-OPT 8000011B24 ≥1 8100011B25 & 8000011B23 UVS1 PU 8200011B26...
Page 180 6F2T0200 (0.15) From UVS1 to UVS4 logics To TRC UVS1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 UVS-OPT-TRIP UVS2-OPT-TRIP UVS3-OPT-TRIP UVS4-OPT-TRIP UVS1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 UVS-OPT-ALARM UVS2-OPT- ALARM UVS3-OPT- ALARM UVS4-OPT- ALARM UVS-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 UVS-OPT-AR UVS1-OPT-AR UVS-OPT-BR UVS1-OPT-BR UVS-OPT-CR UVS1-OPT-CR UVS2-OPT-AR ≥1 UVS2-OPT-BR UVS2-OPT-CR UVS3-OPT-AR ≥1 UVS3-OPT-BR UVS3-OPT-CR UVS4-OPT-AR UVS4-OPT-BR UVS4-OPT-CR...
Page 181 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.14.5 Setting of UVS_MV (Function ID: 471181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note UVSBLK-EN Off / On - Operation canceled when UVSBLK operated UVSBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V Threshold of UVSBLK element 10.0 TUVBLK 0.00 – 300.00 s UVSBLK operation delay timer 10.00 UVS1-EN...
Page 182 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of UVS_MV (Function ID: 471181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note TUVS4 0.00 - 300.00 s UVS4 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 IDMT UVS4 5.0 - 130.0 V UVS4 threshold 60.0 UVS4-DPR 100 - 120 % UVS4 drop-out/pick-up ratio UVS4-TMS 0.010 - 100.000...
Page 183 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.14.6 Signal monitoring point ◆ UVS_MV (Function ID: 471181) Element ID Name Description 8000001BB0 CB_APH_OPEN A phase CB open 8100001BB1 CB_BPH_OPEN B phase CB open 8200001BB2 CB_CPH_OPEN C phase CB open 8C00001B65 UVS-OPT-AB UVS protection operated (phase-AB) 8400001B64 UVS-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by UVS protection...
Page 184 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ UVS_MV (Function ID: 471181) Element ID Name Description 8400021C24 UVS2PU-AB UVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB) 8500021C25 UVS2PU-BC UVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC) 8600021C26 UVS2PU-CA UVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA) 8100021B61 UVS2PU-OR UVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
Page 185 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection point in PLC logic ◆ UVS_MV (Function ID: 471181) Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN A phase CB open 810000EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN B phase CB open 820000EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN C phase CB open 800001EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command 810002EBB0 UVS2_BLOCK UVS2 protection block command...
Page 186 6F2T0200 (0.15) Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV) The over voltage protection function for phase (OV) detects an over voltage condition that phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting and operates accordingly. The OV function has four stages (elements; OV1, OV2, OV3, and OV4), which operate independently. The OV element has a time delay characteristic;...
Page 187 6F2T0200 (0.15) Drop-off and pickup characteristic 2.15.1 Figure 2.15-1 shows the characteristic of the OV element. The outer circle shows the threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OV. Pickup Dropoff Figure 2.15-1 Characteristic of OV element...
Page 188 6F2T0200 (0.15) level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.15-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the OV element when a multiplier setting [OV1-TMS] is used. The OV element uses Equation (2.15-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127: �� (2.15-1) ��...
Page 189 6F2T0200 (0.15) As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OV1 element is paralyzed in the reset time set by [TOV1R]. If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time counter reaches at trip level, the OV1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay.
Page 190 6F2T0200 (0.15) the trip command is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [OV1-UseFor]. †Note: For more information about the trip circuit, see Chapter 2.23. Execution of OV function (iii) Set On for scheme switch [OV1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [OV1-EN] if the OV1 element is not required to operate.
Page 191 6F2T0200 (0.15) From OV1 to OV4 logics To TRC OV1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 OV-OPT-TRIP OV2-OPT-TRIP OV3-OPT-TRIP OV4-OPT-TRIP OV1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 OV-OPT-ALARM OV2-OPT- ALARM OV3-OPT- ALARM OV4-OPT- ALARM OV1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 OV-ARC-BLOCK OV2- ARC-BLOCK OV3- ARC-BLOCK OV4- ARC-BLOCK ≥1 OV-OPT-AR OV1-OPT-AR OV1-OPT-BR OV-OPT-BR OV-OPT-CR OV1-OPT-CR OV2-OPT-AR ≥1 OV2-OPT-BR...
Page 192 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.15.6 Setting of OV_MV (Function ID: 460181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note OV1-EN Off / On - OV1 protection scheme switch OV2-EN Off / On - OV2 protection scheme switch OV3-EN Off / On - OV3 protection scheme switch OV4-EN Off / On - OV4 protection scheme switch...
Page 193 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of OV_MV (Function ID: 460181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note OV4-DPR 10 - 100 % OV4 drop-out/pick-up ratio OV4-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - OV4 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000 TOV4R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV4 definite time reset delay 1.0 - 220.0 V OV4 threshold 120.0...
Page 194 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.15.7 Signal monitoring point ◆ OV_MV (Function ID: 460181) Element ID Name Description 8800001B62 OV-OPT-A OV protection operated (phase-A) 8400001B61 OV-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OV protection 8900001B63 OV-OPT-B OV protection operated (phase-B) 8A00001B64 OV-OPT-C OV protection operated (phase-C) 8300001B23 OV-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by OV protection...
Page 195 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ OV_MV (Function ID: 460181) Element ID Name Description 8A00031C22 OV3-C OV3 relay element operated (phase-C) 8000031A60 OV3-DEF-A OV3 phase_A def output 8000031A61 OV3-DEF-B OV3 phase_B def output 8000031A62 OV3-DEF-C OV3 phase_C def output 8200031B65 OV3-OPT OV3 protection operated 8800031B62...
Page 196 6F2T0200 (0.15) Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS) The over voltage protection function in phase-to-phase (OVS) detects an over voltage condition that phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting and operates accordingly. The OVS function has four stages (elements; OVS1, OVS2, OVS3, and OVS4), which operate independently.
Page 197 6F2T0200 (0.15) Drop-off and pickup setting 2.16.1 Figure 2.16-1 shows the characteristic of the OVS element. The outer circle shows the threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVS. Pickup Dropoff Figure 2.16-1 Characteristic of OVS element...
Page 198 6F2T0200 (0.15) The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.16-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the OVS element when a multiplier setting is used. The OVS element uses Equation (2.16-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127: ��...
Page 199 6F2T0200 (0.15) As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVS1 element is paralyzed in the reset time set by [TOVS1R]. If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time counter reaches at trip level, the OVS1 element will issue a trip signal after a certain delay.
Page 200 6F2T0200 (0.15) Switch of OVS trip signal (ii) The OVS function issues a trip signal for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme switch [OVS1-UseFor] as the normal trip operation. However, when an alarm signal in place of the trip signal is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [OVS1-UseFor].
Page 201 6F2T0200 (0.15) From OVS1 to OVS4 logics To TRC OVS1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 OVS-OPT-TRIP OVS2-OPT-TRIP OVS3-OPT-TRIP OVS4-OPT-TRIP OVS1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 OVS-OPT-ALARM OVS2-OPT- ALARM OVS3-OPT- ALARM OVS4-OPT- ALARM OVS1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 OVS2- ARC-BLOCK OVS-ARC-BLOCK OVS3- ARC-BLOCK OVS4- ARC-BLOCK ≥1 OVS-OPT-AR OVS1-OPT-AR OVS-OPT-BR OVS1-OPT-BR OVS-OPT-CR OVS1-OPT-CR OVS2-OPT-AR ≥1 OVS2-OPT-BR...
Page 202 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.16.6 Setting of OVS_MV (Function ID: 461181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note OVS1-EN Off / On - OVS1 protection scheme switch OVS2-EN Off / On - OVS2 protection scheme switch OVS3-EN Off / On - OVS3 protection scheme switch OVS4-EN Off / On - OVS4 protection scheme switch...
Page 203 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of OVS_MV (Function ID: 461181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note OVS4-DPR 10 - 100 % OVS4 drop-out/pick-up ratio OVS4-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - OVS4 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000 TOVS4R 0.0 - 300.0 s OVS4 definite time reset delay OVS4 1.0 - 220.0 V OVS4 threshold...
Page 204 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.16.7 Signal monitoring point ◆ OVS_MV (Function ID: 461181) Element ID Name Description 8C00001B62 OVS-OPT-AB OVS protection operated (phase-AB) 8400001B61 OVS-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OVS protection 8D00001B63 OVS-OPT-BC OVS protection operated (phase-BC) 8E00001B64 OVS-OPT-CA OVS protection operated (phase-CA) 8300001B23 OVS-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by OVS protection...
Page 205 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ OVS_MV (Function ID: 461181) Element ID Name Description 8A00031C22 OVS3-CA OVS3 relay element operated (phase-CA) 8000031A60 OVS3-DEF-AB OVS3 phase_AB def output 8000031A61 OVS3-DEF-BC OVS3 phase_BC def output 8000031A62 OVS3-DEF-CA OVS3 phase_CA def output 8200031B65 OVS3-OPT OVS3 protection operated 8800031B62...
Page 206 6F2T0200 (0.15) Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG) Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG) function has four stages (OVG1, OVG2, OVG3, and OVG4); and the time characteristic of each stage can be taken from either definite time or inverse definite minimum time. The purpose of each stage of the OVG is to detect earth fault on unearthed, resistance-earthed system or AC generators.
Page 207 6F2T0200 (0.15) Drop-off and pickup setting 2.17.1 Figure 2.17-1 shows the characteristic of the OVG element. The outer circle shows the threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVG. Pickup Dropoff Figure 2.17-1 Setting points of OVG...
Page 208 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation feature The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.17-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the OVG element when a multiplier setting is used. The OVG element uses Equation (2.17-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127: ��...
Page 209 6F2T0200 (0.15) As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVG1 element is paralyzed in the reset time set by [TOVG1R]. If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time counter reaches at trip level, the OVG1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay.
Page 210 6F2T0200 (0.15) of the trip command is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [OVG1-UseFor]. †Note: For more information of the trip circuit, see Chapter 2.23. Execution of OVG function (iii) Set On for scheme switch [OVG1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [OVG1-EN] if the OVG1 element is not required to operate.
Page 211 6F2T0200 (0.15) From OVG1 to OVG4 logics To TRC OVG1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 OVG-OPT-TRIP OVG2-OPT-TRIP OVG3-OPT-TRIP OVG4-OPT-TRIP OVG1-OPT-ALARM OVG-OPT-ALARM ≥1 OVG2-OPT- ALARM OVG3-OPT- ALARM OVG4-OPT- ALARM OVG-ARC-BLOCK To Recording OVG1-OPT OVG1-OPT OVG2-OPT OVG2-OPT OVG3-OPT OVG3-OPT OVG4-OPT OVG4-OPT Figure 2.17-5 Grouping logic for TRC/Recording GRE200 (1,2) - 192 -...
Page 212 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.17.6 Setting of OVG_MV (Function ID: 462181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note OVG1-EN Off / On - OVG1 protection scheme switch OVG2-EN Off / On - OVG2 protection scheme switch OVG3-EN Off / On - OVG3 protection scheme switch OVG4-EN Off / On - OVG4 protection scheme switch...
Page 213 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of OVG_MV (Function ID: 462181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note OVG4-DPR 10 - 100 % OVG4 drop-out/pick-up ratio OVG4-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - OVG4 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000 TOVG4R 0.0 - 300.0 s OVG4 definite time reset delay OVG4 1.0 - 220.0 V OVG4 threshold...
Page 214 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.17.7 Signal monitoring point ◆ OVG_MV (Function ID: 462181) Element ID Name Description 8400001B61 OVG-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG protection 8300001B23 OVG-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by OVG protection 8000011C23 OVG1 OVG1 relay element operated 8000011A60 OVG1-DEF OVG1 def output 8000011B60 OVG1-OPT OVG1 protection operated...
Page 215 6F2T0200 (0.15) Negative sequence overvoltage protection (OVN) Negative sequence voltage, in the supply or source circuits, is used to detect phase unbalance and phase reversal. The function of overvoltage protection of negative sequence (OVN) has four stages (OVN1 to OVN4) and the time characteristic of each stage can be obtained from definite time or inverse definite minimum time either.
Page 216 6F2T0200 (0.15) Drop-off and pickup setting 2.18.1 Figure 2.17-1 shows the characteristic of the OVN element. The outer circle shows the threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVN. Pickup Dropoff Figure 2.18-1 Setting points of OVN...
Page 217 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation feature The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.16-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the OVN element when a multiplier setting is used. The OVN element uses Equation (2.16-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127: ��...
Page 218 6F2T0200 (0.15) As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVN1 element is paralyzed in the reset time set by [TOVN1R]. If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time counter reaches at trip level, the OVN1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay.
Page 219 6F2T0200 (0.15) Switch of OVN trip command (ii) The OVN function issues a trip command for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme switch [OVN1-UseFor] as the normal trip operation. However, when an alarm signal in place of the trip command is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [OVN1-UseFor].
Page 220 6F2T0200 (0.15) From OVN1 to OVN4 logics To TRC OVN1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 OVN-OPT-TRIP OVN2-OPT-TRIP OVN3-OPT-TRIP OVN4-OPT-TRIP OVN1-OPT-ALARM OVN-OPT-ALARM ≥1 OVN2-OPT- ALARM OVN3-OPT- ALARM OVN4-OPT- ALARM OVN-ARC-BLOCK To Recording OVN1-OPT OVN1-OPT OVN2-OPT OVN2-OPT OVN3-OPT OVN3-OPT OVN4-OPT OVN4-OPT Figure 2.18-5 Grouping logic for TRC/Recording Application 2.18.6 Negative sequence voltage is used to detect unbalance in the system, such as three-phase motor.
Page 221 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.18.7 Setting of OVN_MV (Function ID: 464181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note OVN1-EN Off / On - OVN1 protection scheme switch OVN2-EN Off / On - OVN2 protection scheme switch OVN3-EN Off / On - OVN3 protection scheme switch OVN4-EN Off / On - OVN4 protection scheme switch...
Page 222 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of OVN_MV (Function ID: 464181) Setting device Range Contents Default Unit Note OVN4-DPR 10 - 100 % OVN4 drop-out/pick-up ratio OVN4-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - OVN4 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000 TOVN4R 0.0 - 300.0 s OVN4 definite time reset delay OVN4 1.0 - 220.0 V OVN4 threshold...
Page 223 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.18.8 Signal monitoring point ◆ OVN_MV (Function ID: 464181) Element ID Name Description 8400001B61 OVN-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OVN protection 8300001B23 OVN-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by OVN protection 8000011C23 OVN1 OVN1 relay element operated 8000011A60 OVN1-DEF OVN1 def output 8000011B60 OVN1-OPT OVN1 protection operated...
Page 224 6F2T0200 (0.15) Frequency protection with 8 stages (FRQ/DFRQ) The frequency protection (FRQ and DFRQ) functions have eight frequency elements (stages) to detect frequency-deviations and frequency-changes. If the deviations or changes occur, the FRQ and DFRQ functions issue a trip or alarm signal in response to the degree of the frequency-deviation/change.
Page 225 6F2T0200 (0.15) FRQ features and characteristics 2.19.1 Either an under-frequency element (UF) or an over-frequency element (OF) is used to monitor the frequency-deviation; it is possible to set the degree of frequency deviation at each frequency. The UF element is applied to monitor the balance between the power generation capability and the loads.
Page 226 6F2T0200 (0.15) acquired voltage is smaller than the pickup voltage to be set. Enabling FRQ function (ii) The user should set On to enable the FRQ function using scheme switch [FRQ1-EN]. If the user do not require the FRQ operation, Off should be set for the scheme switch. FRQ trip signal (iii) The FRQ can issue a trip signal for the function of trip circuit (TRC) when Trip is set for scheme...
Page 227 6F2T0200 (0.15) To DFRQ 8700001C23 FRQUVBLK NON FRQBLK (UVBLK) 8000011BB1 8000011C23 8000011B60 TFRQ1 & ≥1 FRQ-S1-OPT & & 800001EBB1 FRQ-S1-OPT FRQ1 0.00 - 300.00s To TRC Trip & ≥1 FRQ1-UseFor & Alarm FRQ-OPT-TRIP OverFrq & UnderFrq FRQ1-Chara FRQ-OPT-ALARM 8100021BB1 8000021C23 8100021B60 TFRQ2 &...
Page 228 6F2T0200 (0.15) DFRQ features and characteristics 2.19.2 Either a frequency-rise element (RISE) or a frequency-down element (DOWN) is used to monitor the frequency-change. It is required for the user to select either RISE or DOWN element at respective frequencies. The DFRQ is used to ensure the operation of load shedding promptly when the change of frequency is very rapid.
Page 229 6F2T0200 (0.15) scheme switch [DFRQ1-UseFor]. However, when an alarm signal is required in place of the trip signal, the user should set Alarm for scheme switch [DFRQ1-UseFor]. The TRC function is discussed separately. (See Chapter 2.23) DFRQ scheme logic (iv) Figure 2.19-4 shows the scheme logic of the DFRQ function.
Page 230 6F2T0200 (0.15) Rapid change detector 2.19.3 The FRQ operation is stopped substantially by an under-voltage block feature, but the FRQ operation cannot be stopped in the case of some ‘Out of step’ or ‘Loss of synchronism’. When ‘out of steps’ are raised in the particular system, there are possibilities that excess FRQ tripping is carried out after ‘Out of step trip’.
Page 231 6F2T0200 (0.15) Angular frequency Electrical Angular frequency center (x=0.5) (ω 0 +ω d ) (ω 0 ) F(x=0.8) F(x=0.6) F(x=0.4) F(x=0.2) Tendency Tendency Downing frequency Rising frequency Frequency (at x=0.6) (Hz) Nominal (f0) Δf/Δt=1.0Hz/0.05sec =20Hz/s f0 – 0.5 f0 – 1.0 f0 –...
Page 232 6F2T0200 (0.15) RCD logic Figure 2.19-7 illustrates the FRQ1 blocking by (1) RCD, Time derivative of frequency (Δf/Δt) and (2) RCD-AR, active range selection. The user should have settings [FRQ-RCD] and [FRQ- RCD-AR-OF/UF]. 8700001C23 FRQBLK Trip-block logic (UVBLK) 8200211B23 8000211C2C 8000221C23 &...
Page 233 6F2T0200 (0.15) change; the signal is reset when the frequency comes back from the active rage. RCD characteristics (ii) Setting [FRQ-RCD]: Figure 2.19-9 exemplifies ‘Loss of synchronism’. The frequency (f0) changes rapidly at 0.5 sec. and 1.5 sec. When the [FRQ-RCD] has 20 Hz/s setting, the ‘FRQ-RC’...
Page 234 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting [FRQ-RCD]: Figure 2.19-11 examples another example when the [FRQ- RCD] has 20 Hz/s setting. The ‘FRQ-RC’ signal will be generated during the ‘Loss of synchronism’, when the Δf/Δt is larger or more than the setting. Frequency(Hz) f0 + 3.0 Downing(Δf/Δt=20Hz/s) Rising(Δf/Δt=20Hz/s) f0 + 2.5...
Page 235 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.19.4 FRQ_MV(Function ID: 475181) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note FRQ-EN Off / On - FRQ protection enable FRQUVBLK 40.0 - 100.0 V Voltage level of FRQ protection blocking 40.0 FRQ1-EN Off / On - FRQ1 protection enable FRQ2-EN Off / On - FRQ2 protection enable...
Page 236 6F2T0200 (0.15) FRQ_MV(Function ID: 475181) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note DFRQ1 0.1 - 15.0 DFRQ1 threshold Hz/s Output DFRQ1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - DFRQ1 used for trip or alarm Trip DFRQ2 DFRQ2-Chara Rise / Down - The selection of DFRQ2 character Down DFRQ2 0.1 - 15.0...
Page 237 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.19.5 Signal monitoring point ◆ FRQ_MV(Function ID: 475181) Element ID Name Description 8900001C23 FRQUVBLK FRQBLK relay element operated 8400001B61 FRQ-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by FRQ protection 8300001B23 FRQ-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by FRQ protection 8200211B23 FRQ-RC FRQ Rapid Change FLG operated 8000211C23 FRQ-RCD FRQ Rapid Change Detector element operated...
Page 238 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ FRQ_MV(Function ID: 475181) Element ID Name Description 8100021BB1 FRQ-S2-OPT FRQ2 protection operated 8200031BB1 FRQ-S3-OPT FRQ3 protection operated 8300041BB1 FRQ-S4-OPT FRQ4 protection operated 8400051BB1 FRQ-S5-OPT FRQ5 protection operated 8500061BB1 FRQ-S6-OPT FRQ6 protection operated 8600071BB1 FRQ-S7-OPT FRQ7 protection operated 8700081BB1 FRQ-S8-OPT...
Page 239 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ FRQ_MV(Function ID: 475181) Element ID Name Description 8300141B60 DFRQ4-OPT DFRQ4 element operated 8400151B60 DFRQ5-OPT DFRQ5 element operated 8500161B60 DFRQ6-OPT DFRQ6 element operated 8600171B60 DFRQ7-OPT DFRQ7 element operated 8700181B60 DFRQ8-OPT DFRQ8 element operated 8000111BB0 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ1 protection block command 8100121BB0 DFRQ2_BLOCK...
Page 240 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection point in PLC logic ◆ FRQ_MV (Function ID: 475181) Element ID Name Description 830014EBB0 DFRQ4_BLOCK DFRQ4 protection block command 840015EBB0 DFRQ5_BLOCK DFRQ5 protection block command 850016EBB0 DFRQ6_BLOCK DFRQ6 protection block command 860017EBB0 DFRQ7_BLOCK DFRQ7 protection block command 870018EBB0 DFRQ8_BLOCK DFRQ8 protection block command...
Page 241 6F2T0200 (0.15) VT failure detection (VTF) If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the voltage transformer (VT), the operation in relays cannot be obtained properly because the relays do not measure voltages correctly. Therefore, the VT failure detection (VTF) function is provided to block operating the relays upon occurrence of the VT failure.
Page 242 6F2T0200 (0.15) VTF features 2.20.1 The VTF function has four relay elements in order to decide the failure in the VT; hence two criterions (i.e., for VTF1 and VTF2) exist to detect the failure in the VT. Phase-to-earth under voltage element (UVVTF) For the VTF1 function, the under-voltage element (UVVTF) monitors the under voltage.
Page 243 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scheme Logic 2.20.3 Figure 2.20-1 shows the logics of the VTF function. As described earlier, the VT failure is grouped into the VTF1 criterion (VTF1_DETECT) and the VTF2 criterion (VTF2_DETECT). When we consider the VTF1 criterion, the upper logic in Figure 2.20-1 is used; whereas we consider the VTF2 criterion, lower one is used.
Page 244 6F2T0200 (0.15) interface: test-submenu (→p. 900). If a PLC signal is injected at the PLC connection point “VTF_BLOCK”, the operation of the VTF function is blocked. The user can program to inject an external signal for the failure detection using the PLC connection point EXTERNAL_VTF; the VTF_DETECT signal is generated when the signal is injected at the EXTERNAL_VTF.
Page 245 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.20.4 VTF_MV (Function ID: 490081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note VTF1 VTF1-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF1 scheme switch UVVTF 1.0 - 220.0 V Phase under voltage revel for VTF1 detection 20.0 VTF2 VTF2-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF2 scheme switch...
Page 246 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.20.5 Signal monitoring point ◆ VTF_MV (Function ID: 490081) Element ID Name Description 8400001C2B EFVTF EFVTF relay element operated 8100001BB1 EXTERNAL VTF External VTF receive 8800001C27 OVGVTF OVGVTF relay element operated 8000001C20 UVVTF-A UVVTF relay element operated(Phase-A) 8100001C21 UVVTF-B UVVTF relay element operated(Phase-B)
Page 247 6F2T0200 (0.15) CT failure detection (CTF) If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the current transformer (CT), the operation in relays cannot be obtained properly because the relays do not measure incoming currents correctly. Therefore, the CT failure detection (CTF) function is provided to block operating the relays upon occurrence of the CT failure.
Page 248 6F2T0200 (0.15) CTF features 2.21.1 The CTF function has two relay elements in order to decide the failure in the CT; hence, two criterions exist to detect the failure in the CT in the CTF function. Earth fault overcurrent element (EFCTF) The earth fault overcurrent element (EFCTF) monitors the zero-sequence current for the failure in the CT.
Page 249 6F2T0200 (0.15) 8000001C23 EFCTF & 8100001B60 8000001B61 ≥1 CTF_ALARM To Automatic supervision 10.0s ≥1 0.015s 8100001C27 OVGCTF 0.1s & ≥1 CTF-EN OPT-On & From PROT-CCOMMON CB_ALLPH_CLOSE To EF To BCD 0.02s To OCN To UC 8000001B62 ≥1 ≥1 CTF_DETECT From test AMF_OFF 800000EBB0 CTF_BLOCK...
Page 250 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.21.4 CTF_MV (Function ID: 491081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note CTF-EN Off / On / OPT-On - CTF scheme switch Threshold of overcurrent in zero-sequence EFCTF 0.10 - 150.00 0.20 phase to have CTF detection Threshold of overvoltage in zero-sequence OVGCTF 1.0 - 220.0...
Page 251 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.21.5 Signal monitoring point ◆ CTF_MV (Function ID: 491081) Element ID Name Description 8000001B61 CTF ALARM CTF alarm operated 8000001BB0 CTF BLOCK CTF block operated 8100001B60 CTF DET CTF det 8000001B62 CTF DETECT CTF detect 8000001C23 EFCTF EFCTF relay element operated 8100001BB1 EXTERNAL CTF...
Page 252 6F2T0200 (0.15) Three-phase autoreclose (ARC) The purpose of the autoreclose function (ARC) is to provide an efficient means of restoring service following the tripping of circuit breakers (CBs) for temporary faults. The ARC function is used to maintain the stability and synchronism of the system, whilst at the same time secure the continuity of supply.
Page 253 6F2T0200 (0.15) Outline 2.22.1 The ARC function provides the following features mainly for sub-transmission and distribution lines: 1. Three-phase autoreclosing command, this can be issued upon the reception of a trip signal from the trip circuit (TRC) designed for three-phase tripping. Note that the ARC function here is not designed to reclose the CB on a per-phase tripping basis.
Page 254 6F2T0200 (0.15) auto-reclose was successful, i.e. ‘ARC close success’ and reset its ARC function. Shot number coordination ensures that this does not occur and synchronizes the shot numbers of Relay and Relay Busbar H Semi-temporary Fault F Busbar G Relay Relay Figure 2.22-1 Semi-temporary Fault F and locations of relays Terminology...
Page 255 6F2T0200 (0.15) stage. Multi shot scheme (signals ‘ARC SHOT2–5’) (vi) Signals ‘ARC SHOT2’ to ‘ARC SHOT5’ may be issued after the ‘ARC SHOT1’ signal when a persistent fault occurs. Dead time (delay timers TSHOT, TSHOT_SUB, and TD_MS2–5) (vii) The dead time is the time interval from relay operation i.e. the initiation of the auto-reclose scheme, to the inception of the ‘ARC CLOSE COMMAND’...
Page 256 6F2T0200 (0.15) Decision time for ARC successful operation or failure (setting (xi) TARCDSUC and signal ‘ARC CLOSE FAIL’) The [TARCDSUC] timer provides the following functionality depending on the setting of scheme switch [ARC-SucChk]. Scheme switch [ARC-SucChk]=On With [ARC-SucChk] set to On, timer [TARCDSUC] is used to define the checkpoint at which the CB is closed successfully after issuing the ‘ARC CLOSE COMMAND’...
Page 257 6F2T0200 (0.15) TRC function. If an external relay can generate an ‘ARC_START’ signal, the user can adopt it by programing the binary input circuit (BI) in the PLC function. ‘TREADY’ Reclaim Timer (xiii) Certain considerations are required to ensure that the ARC function is ready for the next cycle of operation;...
Page 258 6F2T0200 (0.15) or more multi-shot schemes (i.e. ‘ARC SHOT3–5’) are not illustrated. That is, the schemes for ‘ARC SHOT3–5’ are similar in operation but are not illustrated To BO ARC CLOSE COMMAN ARC RESET 800000EBBE ARC_BLOCK From TRC ≥1 Final trip stage ARC IN-PROG OR &...
Page 259 6F2T0200 (0.15) From PROT_COMM To Initiation logic TREADY 8000001B63 CB_ALLPH_CLOSE & ARC READY 800000EBB4 CB-ARC READY 0.0-600.0s & ARC=OFF ARC-EN ≥1 ARC=ON & ≥1 ARC SHOT OVER 800000EBB0 ARC-OFF & 810000EBB1 ARC-ON & Signal ‘1’ generated when contradiction between ARC-OFF and ARC-On does not exist.
Page 260 6F2T0200 (0.15) 8100001B60 800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START & EXT_START_SIGNAL & To Final trip stage From TRC & ARC UNREADY ≥1 GEN.TRIP 0.01s ARC SHOT_1ST ARC SHOT OVER Start-up logic & SHOT NUMBER OVER ARC_START ARC READY Start-up logic To ARC SHOT1 logic 8000001B61 To ARC SHOT2 logic ARC_START...
Page 261 6F2T0200 (0.15) a default. When the VCHK function is not implemented, Logic ‘1’ signal (Always high(TRUE)) is applied. §Note: In terms of setting, the value applied to the [ TRR ] timer should be longer than that applied to the [ TSHOT ] timer. Setting [ TSHOT_SUB ] timer may be required if the PLC signal is injected by the user programing.
Page 262 6F2T0200 (0.15) ‡Note: PLC connection point ‘CB_MANUAL_CLOSE’ is provided so that the user can utilize the ARC function to close the CB manually if an external switch (such as a push button on a relay/control panel) is required for manual operation. Success check logic - settings (vi) Figure 2.22-8 illustrates the Success check logic that determines whether the CB closed...
Page 263 6F2T0200 (0.15) To Shot counter coordination logic † MULTI-ARC INTT SHOT COUNTER 8000001B71 To the flip-flop behind the SHOT1 logic STEP0 SHOT_1ST INIT SHOT1 logic ARC SHOT1 8100001B72 To the flip-flop behind the SHOT2 logic SHOT_2ND STEP1 To Start-up logic Initiation logic ARC NOT_IN-PROG SHOT_2ND...
Page 264 6F2T0200 (0.15) Timing diagrams 2.22.5 Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault (Shot1 and successful operation) Figure 2.22-10 illustrates an example for which the single shot scheme has been selected (i.e. [ARCNUM]=S1); an arcing fault is cleared following the operation of the protection relay and the issue of the ‘GEN.TRIP’...
Page 265 6F2T0200 (0.15) Fault current Closed CB Status CB fails to be closed. Open Operated Relay operation Issued GEN.TRIP ARC IN-PROG ARC-S1 IN-PROG ARC SHOT1 Dead time [TSHOT] ARC-S2 IN-PROG ARC SHOT2 ARC-S3 IN-PROG ARC SHOT3 ARC CLOSE COMMAND [TCCW] CB ALLPH Closed CLOSE Open...
Page 266 6F2T0200 (0.15) Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault; fault removed by a backup (iv) Figure 2.22-13 shows the single shot scheme for an Arcing fault, but tripping is not executed due to the failure of the CB. Therefore, the operation of the ARC function is reset in the setting time [TRESET] before the duration of dead timer [TSHOT] expires.
Page 267 6F2T0200 (0.15) Fault current Closed CB Status Open Operated Relay operation Issued GEN.TRIP ARC IN-PROG ARC-S1 IN-PROG ARC SHOT1 Dead time [TSHOT1] ARC-S2 IN-PROG ARC SHOT2 Dead time [TD_MS2] ARC-S3 IN-PROG ARC SHOT3 Dead time [TD_MS3] ARC CLOSE COMMAND [TCCW] [TCCW] [TCCW] Closed...
Page 268 6F2T0200 (0.15) Lateral branch Busbar G Fuse Permanent Fault F Main feeder Fuse Relay OC G in DT , DT , IDMT , IDMT Relay OC R in DT , DT , IDMT , IDMT Sectionalizer Lateral branch Figure 2.22-15 Occurrence of fault and OC operations with ARC †Note: Delayed trip commands following the instantaneous trip commands may be used for realizing time coordination between the relays, sectionalizers and fuses.
Page 269 Relay A 1nd trip 6F2T0200 (0.15) Relay A ARC SHOT1 Relay OC G Current Inflow Pickup in DT G IDMT G DT G DT G Fault current Unfaulted current 3rd trip not 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip performed ARC SHOT1 ARC SHOT2 ARC SHOT1 Relay OC R...
Page 270 6F2T0200 (0.15) Relay OC G OC G Current Inflow ick up DT G DT G IDMT G IDMT G Fault current Unfaulted current 1st trip 2nd trip 3rd and 4th tripping are not performed. CO-OC element Current Pick up Inflow Fault current Drop off Unfaulted current...
Page 271 6F2T0200 (0.15) To Shot counter logic and 8100001B7C Success check logic Sensing a ARC COORD & & different CO-OC duration for the 1CYCLE 3CYCLES & pick-up and drop-off of fault & current 1CYCLE 1CYCLE performed by the ARCCO-OCEN CO-OC and CO-EF elements to determine operation of the...
Page 272 6F2T0200 (0.15) Application guidelines 2.22.8 The application of settings in the ARC function requires careful consideration of the following factors: Frequency and nature of faults The frequency and nature of faults on the distribution line help to decide upon the number of ARC shots desired.
Page 273 6F2T0200 (0.15) these systems. Reclaim Time [TREADY] The reclaim time of the ARC function and making it ready for the next cycle of operation requires certain considerations. Where the incidence of recurrent lightning strikes is experienced, a shorter reclaim time will prevent the ARC function going into an unnecessary lock out.
Page 274 6F2T0200 (0.15) ARC maximum shot number ([ARC-NUM]=S2) Set to two (S2) shots, as CB is capable of only two successive reclosures. ARC reclaim time ([TREADY]): 35.0 seconds The ARC ready logic requires the CB to be in the closed position with CB ARC ready (e.g. closing spring is charged, SF6 gas pressure OK).
Page 275 6F2T0200 (0.15) ARC_SUB_COND. For example, when changing network conditions downstream of the line requires no voltage check (VCHK) for reclosure, then the user can configure the same through PLC by using the ARC_SUB_START and ARC_SUB_SOND signal inputs. Dead time for second shot ([TD_MS2]): 0.33s The same criteria as for the first shot apply for determining the dead time for the second shot.
Page 276 6F2T0200 (0.15) Abandoning time for ARC SHOT2 ([TRR_MS2]): 0.4s The setting of [TRR_MS2] should be longer in duration than the [TD_MS2] timer setting. In this case, it should be set > 0.33s. Setting chosen is 0.4s. Note: The ARC coordination function may be enabled if there is another downstream CB with which shot coordination is required.
Page 277 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.22.9 ARCD_MV(Function ID:4A7081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note ARC-EN Off / On - Auto reclose mode in 1CB-system ARC-NUM S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / S5 - Auto reclose maximum shot number Check ARC-SucChk Off / On - Autoreclose success checking enable...
Page 278 6F2T0200 (0.15) 2.22.10 Signal Signal monitoring points ◆ ARCD_MV (Function ID: 4A7081) Element ID Name Description 8000001B6A ARC CLOSE COMMAND CB close command for ARC 8C00001B6F ARC CLOSE FAIL ARC fail 8000001B70 ARC CLOSE SUCCESS ARC success 8100001B7C ARC COORD ARC Coordination 8400001B6C ARC FT...
Page 279 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection points in PLC logic ◆ ARCD_MV (Function ID: 4A70081) Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 ARC-OFF Request to select Off mode in ARC 810000EBB1 ARC-ON Request to select On mode in ARC 800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START Receipt point from an external relay for starting ARC 800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT Request not to operate...
Page 280 6F2T0200 (0.15) Three-phase trip circuit (TRC) The trip circuit (TRC) scheme will issue a trip command to the circuit breaker (CB) when it receives trip signals from the protection functions (which are identified with ‘FC18’, ‘FC19’, etc. to represent OC, EF relay, etc.). The TRC function can also receive an alternate trip signal generated by an additional relay external to the IED using PLC connection points via the binary IO module (BIO)†.
Page 281 6F2T0200 (0.15) Protection functions TRC function Binary IO module FC1-TRIP-A FC1-TRIP-B TRIP Lateral branch FC1-TRIP-C OPT-TRIP-A -COMMAND CB Trip FC1-TRIP OPT-TRIP-B signal FC1-ARC-BLOCK OPT-TRIP-C generation Trip-command FC1-ALARM Lateral branch collection FC1-AR Main feeder FC1-BR FC1-CR OPT-TRIP FC1-ABR FC1-BCR Protection GEN.TRIP FC1-CAR functions Sub-signal...
Page 282 6F2T0200 (0.15) connection between the BIO module and trip coil circuit is made at the IED terminals. For more information w.r.t the BO circuit concerning the Element ID Technical description: Binary IO module→ p. (Data ID), see Chapter 533. §Note: ARC (Chapter 2.22) and CBF (Chapter 2.12) functions are discussed separately. Chapter Recording function ‡Note: For information of recording, see (→p.
Page 283 6F2T0200 (0.15) ‘FC*_OPT_TRIP’ represents a three-pole trip command. ‘ARC-BLOCK’ represents a signal used to block the operation of the ARC function; the ‘ARC-BLOCK’ signal is transferred to the autoreclose function (ARC). Incidentally, the term ‘FC*’ represents one of the relay elements connected to the TRC function. Table 2.23-2 illustrates CBF function can generate a re-trip signal and an ARC-BLOCK signal.
Page 284 6F2T0200 (0.15) Fault identifier for relay element operated in each phase Protection FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ ‘*’ functions _OPT_ ALARM Phase-A Phase-B Phase-C Phase-AB Phase-BC Phase-CA N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. – – – – –...
Page 285 6F2T0200 (0.15) General-trip-signal production (ii) Figure 2.23-3 illustrates the trip-signal generation logic within the TRC logic. The user can program the generation of a trip signal using the PLC connection point “ADD_OPT_COM”, when trip signals are not available from the relay functions. The “GEN.TRIP”...
Page 286 6F2T0200 (0.15) blocking signals for ARC operation; it groups them into “GEN.ARC-BLOCK” as shown in Figure 2.23-4. A block signal from the CBF function is also integrated into the “GEN.ARC- BLOCK”; then it is transferred to the ARC function. 8500001B65 Protection functions FC*-ARC-BLOCK...
Page 287 6F2T0200 (0.15) To Recording function 8000001B66 8000001B71 ≥1 Protection & OPT-AR OPT.PHASE-A FC*-OPT-AR functions ≥1 FC01 880000EBB8 OPT.P-A_ADD FC02 8100001B67 8000001B72 ≥1 FC*-OPT-BR OPT-BR & OPT.PHASE-B ≥1 890000EBB9 OPT.P-B_ADD 8200001B68 FC40 8000001B73 ≥1 OPT-CR & FC*-OPT-CR OPT.PHASE-C ≥1 8A0000EBBA OPT.P-C_ADD 8000001B74 8400001B69 &...
Page 288 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.23.5 Signal monitoring points ◆ TRCD (Function ID: 4A1001) Element ID Name Description 8100001BB1 ADD_FS Additional fail-safe command 8300001BB2 ADD_OPT_COM Additional operation command 8400001B64 GEN.ALARM Alarm signals generated for recording 8500001B79 GEN.ARC-BLOCK Signal to block the ARC operation with the protection functions and CBF 8300001B6F GEN.TRIP Trip signal generated for recording...
Page 289 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection points in PLC logic ◆ TRCD (Function ID: 4A1001) Element ID Name Description 810000EBB4 TRIP-B_ADD Reception for tripping in phase-B additionally 820000EBB5 TRIP-C_ADD Reception for tripping in phase-C additionally 830000EBB6 TRIP_ADD Reception for three-poles tripping additionally 840000EBB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD Reception of alarm signal additionally 880000EBB8...
Page 290 6F2T0200 (0.15) Protection common (PROT_COMMON) The contact states of the circuit breaker (CB) and the disconnector (DS) provided are grouped in the protection common function (PROT_COMMON) and are used in a number of relay applications to decide conditions. The PROT_COMMON function also examines whether a line is dead (de-energizing), as the PROT_COMMON has an under-voltage detection (UV) relay.
Page 291 6F2T0200 (0.15) Decision of CB open/close status 2.24.1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact is used to state the CB status; a normal-open contact (N/O) and a normal-close contact (N/C) can be furnished in the CB. Thus, as to the phase-A contact of the CB, signals “CB1-A_NO_CONT” and “CB1-A_NC_CONT” can be used to represent the CB status in phase-A (i.e., tripped or closed in phase-A).
Page 292 6F2T0200 (0.15) CB decision logic (iii) Figure 2.24-1 shows the decision logic of the PROT_COMMON and outputs the decision state of the CB: CB-A_CLOSE, CB-B_CLOSE, and others. For the operation, the user should inject signals of CB states for the following PLC connection points: ‘CB1-A NO CONT’, ‘CB1-A NC CONT’...
Page 293 6F2T0200 (0.15) Decision of DS open/close status 2.24.2 The PROT_COMMON function can determine the behavior and position status of a DS. Signal configuration and settings for the DS position status are similar to that of the CB. Note that settings and logics cited below are just available for the DS. Signal selection Set either NO, NC, or Both for scheme switch [DS-Contact].
Page 294 6F2T0200 (0.15) Dead line detection 2.24.3 The dead line detection (DLD) determinates whether the line is out-of-service or energized. Checking for the voltage existence in three-phase is required if all CBs are closed. Under-voltage relay Two relay elements are provide in the UV: a phase-to-phase (UVLS) and a phase-to-ground (UVLG).
Page 295 6F2T0200 (0.15) Detection of current change (OCD) 2.24.4 Current change detection relay Suppose that the difference exists between the latest current phasor (I ) and the last current phasor (I ). The OCD function can operate if the difference is larger than setting [OCD]. The can be measured for the last two-cycles;...
Page 296 6F2T0200 (0.15) User logic switches 2.24.5 PROT_COMMON function has four general-purpose switches; they are ready for the user’s PLC logic. For example, the user can select a mode using [UserLogicSW1] when the PLC#1 logic operates in S1 mode (Purposes: the user can select one of modes in accordance with the time, location, condition, etc.).
Page 297 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.24.6 PROT_COMMON_MV (Function ID: 48A081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note UVLS 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-phase relay operating value 77.0 UVLG 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-ground relay operating value 45.0 0.05 - 1.00 A OCD relay operating value 0.10 CB-Contact...
Page 298 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.24.7 Signal monitoring points ◆ PROT_COMMON_MV (48A081) Element ID Name Description 8000001B88 CB-A_CLOSE CB phase-A closed 8000001B93 CB-A_FAIL CB phase-A contact fail 8000001BB7 CB-A_NC_CONT CB-A normally closed contact 8000001BB0 CB-A_NO_CONT CB-A normally open contact 8400001B8C CB-A_OPEN CB phase-A opened 8100001B89 CB-B_CLOSE CB phase-B closed...
Page 299 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring points ◆ PROT_COMMON_MV (48A081) Element ID Name Description 8000001C69 USR_LG4_S1 User Logic Switch4 S1 8100001C6A USR_LG4_S2 User Logic Switch4 S2 8200001C6B USR_LG4_S3 User Logic Switch4 S3 8000001B60 UVLG-A UVLG relay element operated (phase-A) 8900001B6B UVLG-AND UVLG relay element operated (3-phases AND) 8100001B61 UVLG-B UVLG relay element operated (phase-B)
Page 300 6F2T0200 (0.15) Voltage check for autoreclose (VCHK) To start the autoreclose function (ARC), a synchronism check may be required between the incoming voltage and the running voltage. Hence, a voltage-check-for-autoreclose (VCHK) function is provided within the (ARC) to fulfil this requirement. The (VCHK) function checks the absence/presence of the incoming/running voltages and the difference in their respective voltages, phase angle and frequencies.
Page 301 6F2T0200 (0.15) Voltage condition and check zone 2.25.1 To provide the voltage and synchronism check schemes, the VCHK function has the following relay elements: OVB, OVL, UVB, and UVL. The OVB and OVL elements are used to verify the presence of voltage on the busbar and the line respectively, whereas the UVB and UVL elements are used to verify the absence of voltage on the busbar and the line respectively.
Page 302 6F2T0200 (0.15) Synchronism check scheme 2.25.2 The VCHK function has a measuring element to check the difference between a running voltage and an incoming voltage. The measuring element can check phase angles, voltages, and frequencies. Operation in the synchronism check mode is carried out in the ‘B1’ zone, as shown in Table 2.25-1.
Page 303 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting Range Units Comment Setting for difference angle between V B and V L SYN-Angle 0–75 Checking V L for “Line being in live condition” VCHK-OVL 10–150 Checking V B for “Busbar being in live condition” VCHK-OVB 10–150 T_SYN 0.01–100.00 Delay time for Synchro-check...
Page 304 6F2T0200 (0.15) Phase angle difference (iv) The phase difference between the running voltage and the incoming voltage (θ) is smaller than the SYN1 setting: V B × V L cosθ ≥ 0 V B × V L sin ([SYN-Angle]) ≥ V B × V L sin θ Notice and tips If the frequency difference between the V L and the V B is shown very large, the VCHK may fail to make the decision for the synchronism, although Off is set for the...
Page 305 6F2T0200 (0.15) ��⁡[T_SYN] (2.25-6) ⁡ > ÷ ∆��[��] Setting⁡[SYN-Angle] 180° ��⁡[SYN-Angle] (2.25-7) ��⁡ [ T_SYN ] < × 180° ∆��[��] V L : fV L =50.02Hz V B : fV B =50.00Hz time Δf Δf Δf – – Example: |fV B fV L |=|50.00Hz 50.02Hz| = 0.02Hz = 10s SYN-Angle...
Page 306 6F2T0200 (0.15) VCHK setting 2.25.3 When the VCHK is applied to 1CB system, OVB and UVB check the voltage of a Busbar, whereas OVL and UVL checks the voltage of Line, as described earlier. The Busbar and Line voltages are obtained in the VCT .
Page 307 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting example 1 (Bus-bar VT=Three phases, Line VT=phase-A) Line VCT 1 Line VT (Phase-A) V L1 (V a ) V L2 (V b ) Bus-bar VT (Three-phase) V L3 (V c ) a. Phasor diagram in Line Vs (Vs) b.
Page 308 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting example 2 (Bus-bar VT=three phases, Line VT=phase-BC) (ii) Line Line VT (Phase B-C) V a (V L1 ) V b (V L2 ) Bus-bar VT (Three Phase) V bc V c (V L3 ) a. Phasor diagram in Bus-bar Vs (Vs) b.
Page 309 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting example 3 (Bus-bar VT=Phase-C, Line VT= Three-phase) (iii) Line Line VT (Three phase) V a (V L1 ) V b (V L2 ) Bus-bar VT (Phase C) V c (V L3 ) a. Phasor diagram in Line Vc (Vs) b.
Page 310 6F2T0200 (0.15) Check logic for the voltage and the synchronism 2.25.4 The VCHK function can send the permissive signal when the results of the voltage check and synchronism check are successful, as described earlier. Figure 2.25-8 illustrates that the ARC- VCHK signal is sent to the ARC function when one or more of the following conditions are established: (1) Synchronism check operates, (2) the OVB and UVL elements operate, (3) the UVB and OVL elements operate or (4) the UVB and UVL elements operate.
Page 311 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.25.5 VCHK_MV (Function ID:4A8081) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note ARC-VCHK- Off / On - VCHK enabling switch VCHK V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 / V- SYN-Vbus L12 / V-L23 / V-L31 / - Running Voltage V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 / V- SYN-Vline L12 / V-L23 / V-L31 /...
Page 312 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.25.6 Signal monitoring point ◆ VCHK_MV (Function ID: 4A8081) Element ID Name Description 8000011B23 ARC-VCHK Voltage check for autoreclose 8200011B62 OVB relay element operated 8300011B60 OVL relay element operated 8C00011B67 OVLL-1 OVLL relay element operated (phase-1) 8D00011B68 OVLL-2 OVLL relay element operated (phase-2) 8E00011B69...
Page 313 6F2T0200 (0.15) Single-end fault locator (FL) The function of the single-end fault locator (FL) is to determine the location of faults that occur on a transmission line with a high degree of reliability. Determination of the location of faults provides a useful contribution to the recovery of circuits in the event of power system failures. Fault location is provided by the FL function;...
Page 314 6F2T0200 (0.15) Computation method 2.26.1 The FL calculation requires more than three cycles of power system information to determine the location of the fault. The FL calculation uses a reference current (I f ’) obtained by measuring the change in the current before and after the occurrence of a fault. The reference current (I f ’) removes the influence of load current (I L ) and arc voltage.
Page 315 6F2T0200 (0.15) Line GH Distance GF Bus G Bus H Line 1 Fault F Source Load/Source Line 2 G’ H’ Figure 2.26-1 Relationship between fault location and local IED in parallel line − I ⁡– I (2.26-1) α − I ⁡–...
Page 316 6F2T0200 (0.15) [FL_Ka] Imaginary part when a value is placed in parentheses Im(⁡): Real part when a value is placed in parentheses Re(⁡): Length of line GH in kilometers or miles, [FL_line_km] / [FL_line_mile] • : Symbol of Vector product Equation (2.26-3) is used generally when the transmission lines are treated as having lumped constants.
Page 317 6F2T0200 (0.15) as having lumped constants; Equation (2.26-8) is sufficient to compute the fault distance (GF = χ) for faults that occur within 100km (62 mile) of the length of the transmission line. When the fault distance is greater than 100km (62 mile), Equation (2.26-4) is used to obtain a compensated value for the fault distance (GF = χ").) Output of FL computation on display...
Page 318 6F2T0200 (0.15) As shown in Figure 2.26-1, a single IED is located near Bus G. When a fault (F) occurs on the line GH, the fault distance (GF) is calculated in percent using the following equation. Distance⁡to⁡fault⁡F⁡ (2.26-9) Fault⁡distance⁡(%) = ×...
Page 319 6F2T0200 (0.15) Z aa =Z bb =Z cc and Z ab =Z bc =Z ca ), then symmetrical setting is applicable. If the impedance unbalances cannot be ignored, the user shall set a compensation factor (section (i)-4) or use a matrix setting (section (ii)).The following equations are used to acquire the zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedances.
Page 320 6F2T0200 (0.15) − Z (2.26-12) − Z (2.26-13) − Z (2.26-14) − (2.26-15) − (2.26-16) − (2.26-17) Impedance setting using matrix components (ii) With regard to Figure 2.26-1, when the voltage and current on a transmission line can be expressed using matrix components, the user can select the following matrix setting: (2.26-18) ] = [ where,...
Page 321 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting self-impedances With regard to the self-impedances, the user should set the resistance of the self- impedances for settings [FL_Raa], [FL_Rbb] and [FL_Rcc] and set the reactance of the self-impedances for settings [FL_Xaa], [FL_Xbb] and [FL_Xcc]. Setting mutual-impedances With regard to setting the mutual-impedances, the user should set the resistance of the mutual-impedance for settings [FL_Rab], [FL_Rbc] and [FL_Rca] and set the reactance of the mutual-impedances for settings [FL_Xab], [FL_Xbc], and [FL_Xca].
Page 322 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 2.26-2 Setting [FL_DIR] corresponding to the setting of OC and other relay elements Direction of the relay (OC element etc) Scheme switch [FL_DIR] Forward Forward Reverse Reverse Non-dir Forward / Reverse Setting the unit of length/distance (iv) As shown in Figure 2.26-2, the fault location is displayed in kilometers when km is set for scheme switch [FL_Unit].
Page 323 6F2T0200 (0.15) together with a brief description of each method and the settings necessary for an earth fault. Table 2.26-3 Method and setting of earth fault compensation Required setting objects Required power Compensation Description of the compensation system quantities method method for respective operation...
Page 324 6F2T0200 (0.15) Z1S DIR Forward 310022EC60 FLZ_RecF Trigger signal for data recording in the forward & direction Reverse 310022EC61 FLZ_RecR Trigger signal for data & recording in the reverse direction Trigger signal for Forward computation in the 310022EC62 FLZ_LocF & forward direction Reverse 310022EC63...
Page 325 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.26.5 FL-Z_MV (Function ID: 495081) at Common Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note FL_EN Off / On - Fault locator enable FL_Dir Forward / Reverse - Metering direction Forward FL_ImpSet Symmetrical / Matrix - Selection in the setting mode of impedance Symmetrical Matrix FL_Xaa...
Page 326 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.26.6 Signal monitoring point ◆ FL-Z_MV (Function ID: 495081) Element ID Name Description 8000101349 FltFlag Fault locator update flag 3100101005 FltQuality Quality of fault locator 3100101348 FltLoop Fault loop 4200001340 FltDiskm Fault distance 4200101347 FltZ Fault impedance Connection point on PLC logic ◆...
Page 327 6F2T0200 (0.15) Automatic transfer operation (ATO) Automatic transfer operation (ATO) is the function to issue CB open and CB close commands automatically to change the lines for power reception, when a fault has occurred at substitution. ATO commands shall be customized depending on the lines; hence, the user can describe them separately depending the circuit architectures.
Page 328 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scheme logic 2.27.1 Figure 2.27-2 illustrates the judgement logic of ATO function: (i): if ATO ready condition has been confirmed, (ii): the operation of ATO judgement will be triggered with ATO start condition. (iii): if ATO conclusion is generated at ATO judgement, ATO commands will be issued in order that the lines for power reception shall be changed.
Page 329 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 2.27-3 shows special relays provided in ATO: undervoltage (UVATO1,2) and overcurrent (OCATO) elements. They are used for ATO judgement to serve in versatile architectures (see Figure 2.27-1). Relay element for ATO function ○ 1 Phase UV relay 8000001B69 8000021C20 UVATO1-OR...
Page 330 6F2T0200 (0.15) ATO judgment 2.27.2 Several settings and condition signals are used in the ATO judgement process, which are customized using PLC function. ATO enable condition When On is set for setting [ATO-EN], the ATO judgement process will be allowed to start when ATO_READY signal has been generated at PLC connection point ‘ATO_READY_COND’...
Page 331 6F2T0200 (0.15) Resetting judgment and blocking commands (iv) ATO judgement will be stopped and ATC commands will be blocked, if the below is found in certain circumstances and conditions: Reset condition: Reset condition can be described such that ATO judgement shall be removed when ATO commands are not being generated after the ATO judgement has been generated.
Page 332 6F2T0200 (0.15) ATO special relays for commands 2.27.3 The user can customize ATO judgement scheme using ATO relays: UVATO1/UVATO2 and OCCATO. Undervoltage relay (UVATO1) UVATO1 relay will operate by entering voltages: V L1 , V L2 , and V L3 . The UVATO1 threshold can be set with setting [UVATO1].
Page 333 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting[OCATO] Current and I Figure 2.27-6 OCATO relay characteristic GRE200 (1,2) - 314 -...
Page 334 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.27.4 ATO_MV (Function ID: 4C1081) Defaul Setting items Range Contents Note ATO-EN Off / On - ATO function use or not Blocking or not the ATO function by ROCOC relay ATO-ROCOCBlk Non / Block ROCOC operation ATO-ROCOC-Chara Rise / Down / Both - ROCOC relay character Rise ROCOC_ATO...
Page 335 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.27.5 Signal monitoring points ◆ ATO_MV (Function ID: 4C1081) Element ID Name Description 8200001BB2 ATO_BLOCK ATO function block command 8000001BB4 ATO_COM1_COND1 ATO 1st Command under Condition1 8000001BBA ATO_COM1_COND2 ATO 1st Command under condition2 8100001BB5 ATO_COM2_COND1 ATO 2nd Command under Condition1 8100001BBB ATO_COM2_COND2 ATO 2nd Command under condition2...
Page 336 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection point in PLC logic ◆ ATO_MV (Function ID: 4C1081) Element ID Name Description 830000EBB7 ATO_COM4_COND1 ATO 4th Command under Condition1 830000EBBD ATO_COM4_COND2 ATO 4th Command under condition2 840000EBB8 ATO_COM5_COND1 ATO 5th Command under Condition1 840000EBBE ATO_COM5_COND2 ATO 5th Command under condition2 8F0000EBB9 ATO_COM_COND1 ATO Command under Condition1...
Page 337 6F2T0200 (0.15) Motor protection (Motor) The function of motor protection (MOT) is used to protect the motor from the damage. The MOT has functions of motor status judgement and several motor protections shown below. The user should set On for the setting [Mot-EN] to use the motor protection. -Motor start protection -Thermal overload protection -Stalled motor protection...
Page 338 6F2T0200 (0.15) Motor current / Motor rated current 2.28.1 Motor current is used for the calculation of all motor protections and the motor rated current is needed in the motor status judgement. Motor current There are two techniques, (i)-1 and (i)-2, to find the motor current; either is selectable by the setting.
Page 339 6F2T0200 (0.15) Motor status 2.28.2 Generally, large motor current enters when the motor is started. After that, the motor current (less than the motor rated current) enters in the situation that the motor is running normally. MOT function judges whether the motor status is “Stop”, “Start-up”, or “Running” using the motor current value and the motor start-up time.
Page 340 6F2T0200 (0.15) Motor current Motor start-up time Motor rated current × 1.5 Overload current Motor rated current Motor rated current × 0.05 Time Overload Stop Start-up Running Stop Figure 2.28-1 Usual motor status transition of mode-1 Motor current Motor start-up time Motor rated current ×...
Page 341 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals presented for the motor status (ii) Through the transition of motor statuses, the motor status signals are generated. The user can read a motor status by checking the signals shown in Table 2.28-5. Table 2.28-5 Signals presented for the motor statuses MOT (Function ID: 4C2081) Element ID Name...
Page 342 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 2.28-3.a illustrates the motor status transition when ContStart is set for the setting [Mot-Start-IrrMode1]. Even if the motor start-up time elapses, the motor status is continued “Start-up”. Figure 2.28-3.b illustrates the motor status transition when ChangeRun is set for the setting [Mot-Start-IrrMode1].
Page 343 6F2T0200 (0.15) The operation in this irregular mode is further divided into two modes ((i)-2○ or (i)- 2○ ) depending on whether the motor current exceeds 150% of [Mot-Ir] or falls below, when motor status judgement function is turned on. (iv)-2○...
Page 344 6F2T0200 (0.15) (iv)-2○ Irregular mode-2B: In case of the motor current falls below 150% of [Mot-Ir] We cannot simply determine the finished start-up status by observing the motor current. Therefore, it is possible to define by the setting [Mot-Start-IrrMode2], whether the motor status is to be continued "Start-up" or change to "Running", when the motor start-up time elapses.
Page 345 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operations in Irregular mode As we discussed earlier, the motor status “Start-up” may continue in irregular mode. To avoid this ab-normal state, we can generate a trip signal or alarm signal using setting [Mot-Start-IrrOp]. If On-Trip or On-Alarm is set for the setting [Mot-Start-IrrOp], a trip signal MOT-START- IrrTRIP or alarm signal MOT-START-IrrALARM is generated when the motor start-up time elapses in irregular mode.
Page 346 6F2T0200 (0.15) Motor start protection 2.28.3 The motor start protection can secure the motor when the motor status is “Start-up”. A trip signal can be issued if the motor current value exceeds 150% of [Mot-Ir] for more than a certain time. The motor start protection function can operate when On is set for setting [Mot- StPro-EN].
Page 347 6F2T0200 (0.15) Thermal overload protection 2.28.4 The temperature at the motor stator will rise according to the I t function. The thermal overload protection provides a good protection against stator damage caused by sustained overloading. Element of thermal overload relay (Mot-THM) Thermal state determination Mot-THM simulates the change of thermal state using an algorithm;...
Page 348 6F2T0200 (0.15) where time to operate for a constant overload current of I (minutes) motor current (amperes) allowable overload current (amperes) of the stator, defined by the setting [Mot-THM] the pre-motor current (amperes) τ thermal time constant (minutes), defined by the setting [T-Mot-THM] natural logarithm In Equation (2.28-5), cold curves are special versions of the hot curves where Ip is zero, catering for the situation where a cold system is switched onto an immediate overload.
Page 349 6F2T0200 (0.15) −�� (2.28-7) ⁄ θs = θstop ( 0 ) ∙ �� × 100⁡(%) ��2 where θs thermal state of the stator as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity θstop(0) thermal state of the stator at the instant when the motor stops τ...
Page 350 6F2T0200 (0.15) Stalled motor protection 2.28.5 The stalled motor protection determines whether the motor is staying at stalled condition during the condition, when the motor status is being start-up or running. The stalled motor protection can issue a trip signal, when overcurrent relay (Mot-Stall-OC) operates and the stalled motor protection receives a speed switch signal from the tachometer.
Page 351 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 2.28-9 Settings corresponded for the Mot-Stall function Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Mot-Stall-EN Off / On Stalled motor protection enable 5.00 Mot-Stall-OC 0.10 - 50.00 Overcurrent threshold of stalled motor protection 0.00 T-Mot-Stall 0.00 - 300.00 Time for stalled motor protection judgment GRE200 (1,2) - 332 -...
Page 352 6F2T0200 (0.15) Locked rotor protection 2.28.6 The locked rotor protection is a function for protecting the rotor of the motor as opposed to the thermal overload protection function that protects the stator of the motor. The locked rotor protection simulates the temperature rise of the rotor, because the stator and the rotor have different thermal characteristics.
Page 353 6F2T0200 (0.15) characteristic determined by the motor start-up current (Ist) and the allowable locked rotor time (Tsc). If the motor current is larger than 2.5 times the motor rated current, the thermal state of the rotor can be calculated in Equation (2.28-10). Furthermore, if the thermal state of rotor (θr) exceeds the allowable thermal capacity of rotor (θrm), the Mot-LKRT element operates.
Page 354 6F2T0200 (0.15) ��[Mot-Ir] ×100(%) ��[Mot-THM] Motor in actual operating condition In the actual operating condition, θr(0) is able to stay among 0 and θsn in Equation (2.28-10). As a results, the operating time Top is given by Equation (2.28-12). �� −...
Page 355 6F2T0200 (0.15) Thermal Curves of ≥ Locked Rotor Protection (I 2.5x[Mot-Ir]) Current (A) Figure 2.28-13 Thermal curve of locked rotor protection (I ≥ 2.5x[Mot-Ir]) - Motor rated current : [Mot-Ir] = 1.00A - Motor start-up current (Ist) : [Mot-LKRT-IS] = 5.00A (5 times motor rated current) - Allowable locking time in the cold state (Tsc) : [T-Mot-LKRT] = 10s - Allowable thermal capacity of rotor (θrm) : [Mot-LKRT] = 150% GRE200 (1,2)
Page 356 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scheme logic The scheme logic of the locked rotor protection is illustrated in Figure 2.28-14. The Mot- LKRT operation can be blocked when a signal is generated at PLC connection point [Mot-LKRT_BLOCK]. 8000311C23 8000001B72 Mot-LKRT Mot-LKRT-TRIP & & Mot-LKRT-EN MotSt-Irreg-Op 840000EBB6...
Page 357 6F2T0200 (0.15) Restart inhibit function 2.28.7 The restart inhibit function is a function to prevent the motor startup again in order that the motor shall be protected from the damage, if the motor has been started up repeatedly. The restart inhibit function is made of two sub-functions: - Thermal state of rotor function - Starts per hour function Thermal state of rotor function...
Page 358 6F2T0200 (0.15) How to determine thermal state of rotor (Mot-THSR operation) The rotor heating caused by a single starting operation is expressed in Equation (2.28-13): I(t) (2.28-13) ∙ T ∙ ∙ �� At start-up I(t) = I , then the expression becomes as Equation (2.28-14): (2.28-14) ∙...
Page 359 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scheme logic The scheme logic of the restart inhibit function including the thermal state of rotor function will be illustrated in Figure 2.28-18. The function can be blocked when a signal is generated at PLC connection point [Mot-THSR_BLOCK]. Table 2.28-11 Settings corresponded to the Mot-THSR Setting items Range...
Page 360 6F2T0200 (0.15) judgement processes, and Mot-STPH is operating based on generation of these "judgment result". Timing of motor start-up Motor status Start-up 1 hour (1st) 1 hour (2nd) 1 hour (3rd) Count of the number of times the motor has 1 hour (4th) started within 1 hour 1 hour (5th)
Page 361 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scheme logic of the restart inhibit function (iii) Figure 2.28-18 shows the scheme logic of the restart inhibit function constructed by the thermal state of rotor function and the starts per hour function. The signal “Mot-RSIH CBBLK” used to block CB closing is generated by the operating of the thermal state of rotor function and the starts per hour function.
Page 362 6F2T0200 (0.15) Grouping commands for the trip circuit 2.28.8 Figure 2.28-19 shows grouping commands for the trip circuit (TRC). The MOT trip signal is connected to the TRC. (For more information, see Chapter 2.23). 8300001B79 To TRC Mot-START-IrrTRIP MOT-OPT-TRIP ≥1 Mot-STPRO-TRIP Mot-THM-TRIP Mot-STALL-TRIP...
Page 363 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.28.9 MOT_MV (Function ID: 4C2081) Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note Mot-EN Off / On Motor protection function enable Mot-Ir 0.20 - 10.00 A Motor rated current 1.00 Max phase / Selection of current for motor protection Mot-Itype Equivalent Equivalent...
Page 364 6F2T0200 (0.15) 2.28.10 Signal Signal monitoring points ◆ MOT_MV (Function ID: 4C2081) Element ID Name Description 8000001B60 StayedAtStop 8000001B61 Start-upPassed 8000001B62 Under_150 8000001B65 MotorStatus=Stop 8000001B69 MotorStatus 8000001B6B Mot-START-IrrTRIP 8000001B6D Mot-STPRO-TRIP 8000001B6F Mot-THM-TRIP 8000001B70 Mot-STALL-TRIP 8000001B72 Mot-LKRT-TRIP 8000001B73 Mot-THSR-ALARM 8000001B74 Mot-STPH 8000001B77 Mot-RSIH-CBCLBLK 8000001BB0...
Page 365 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection point in PLC logic ◆ MOT_MV (Function ID: 4C2081) Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 Mot-Stall_SpSW 800000EBB2 Mot-StPro_BLOCK 800000EBB9 Mot-STPH_RESET 810000EBB1 Mot-EMR_START 810000EBB3 Mot-THMA_BLOCK 820000EBB4 Mot-THMT_BLOCK 830000EBB5 Mot-Stall_BLOCK 840000EBB6 Mot-LKRT_BLOCK 850000EBB7 Mot-THSR_BLOCK 860000EBB8 Mot-STPH_BLOCK Measuring point for Monitoring function ◆...
Page 366 6F2T0200 (0.15) Reverse power protection (REVPOW) Reverse power protection (REVPOW) is used to save the motor from the damage by detecting the reverse power regarding active power and reactive power. The REVPOW function consists of reverse active power protection (RP) and reverse reactive power protection (RQ). They have two independent stages (i.e., independent elements).
Page 367 6F2T0200 (0.15) Reverse active power protection (RP) 2.29.1 The RP function consists of two stages (elements) independently (RP1 and RP2). RP1 element characteristic Figure 2.29-1 shows the characteristic of the RP1 element. Q(var) P(W) [RP1] Setting Figure 2.29-1 Characteristic of RP1 element Determination of active power flow: The user shall set a direction about active power, which the user can find the corresponding information in Chapter 9.2.4(i).
Page 368 6F2T0200 (0.15) The RP1 element operation can be blocked when the entering voltage is less than the value, which will be adjusted using setting [UV-RPBLK]. To block it, the user should set Block for setting [RP-UVBlk]. Delaying RP1 operation (ii) There is a delay timer in the PR1 logic, so the user can delay its operation with setting [TRP1], which can be found in the RP function logic (see Figure 2.29-2).
Page 369 6F2T0200 (0.15) RP1 scheme logic (iv) RP1 scheme logic is illustrated in Figure 2.29-2. Figure 2.29-3 shows signals grouped for the trip commands (for more information about the trip signals, see Chapter 2.23). 8000201C60 8000031B68 8000021B23 TRP1 RP1-OPT RP1-OPT-TRIP & &...
Page 370 6F2T0200 (0.15) Reverse reactive power protection (RQ) 2.29.2 The RQ function (RQ) consists of two stages (elements) independently (RQ1 and RQ2) RQ1 element characteristic Figure 2.29-4 shows the characteristic of the RQ1 element. Q(var) P(W) Setting[RQ1] Figure 2.29-4 Characteristic of RQ1 element Determination of reactive power flow: The user shall set a flow direction about reactive power, which the user can find the Monitoring function...
Page 371 6F2T0200 (0.15) The RQ1 element operation can be blocked when the entering voltage is less than a value, which will be adjusted with setting [UV-RQBLK]. To block it, the user should set Block for setting [RQ-UVBlk]. Delaying RQ1 operation (ii) There is a delay timer in the RQ1 logic, so the user can delay its operation with setting [TRQ1], which can be found in the RQ function logic (Figure 2.29-5).
Page 372 6F2T0200 (0.15) RQ1 scheme logic (iv) RQ1 scheme logic is illustrated in Figure 2.29-5. Figure 2.29-6 shows commands grouped for the trip signals, which can be connected with the trip circuit: see Chapter 2.23. 8000301C60 8000031B68 8000031B23 TRQ1 RQ1-OPT RQ1-OPT-TRIP &...
Page 373 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 2.29.3 REVPOW_MV (Function ID: 4C0081) Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note RP-Power DEP / Send / Receive Power direction definition Send RP-UVBlk Non / Block UV block function enable UV-RPBLK 5.0 - 100.0 UV block threshold RP1-EN Off / On RP1 protection enable...
Page 374 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 2.29.4 Signal monitoring points ◆ REVPOW_MV (Function ID: 4C0081) Element ID Name Description 3100001B60 REVPOW-OPERATION REVPOW protection operated 8400001B69 REVPOW-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by REVPOW protection 8300001B23 REVPOW-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by REVPOW protection 8100001B62 RP-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by RP protection operation 8000001B61 RP-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by RP protection operation...
Page 375 6F2T0200 (0.15) General control function Contents Pages Pages Common controls (CMNCTRL) LED reset function (LEDR) Control hierarchy Local control (L) Control level and control point Mode control function (MDCTRL) Control right Select-before-operation mode (SBO) Control scheme PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signals Counter function for the general (GCNT) Programmable logic control (PLC) Direct-operation mode (DIR) Remote control (R)
Page 376 6F2T0200 (0.15) Control scheme Figure 3.1-1 shows the control overview for the control function; there are two control stages: “Wait for a command” and “Receiving commands”. The function will wait for a command from the server in the first stage. During the receiving stage, the function will respond to “Select”, “Cancel”, and “Operate”...
Page 377 6F2T0200 (0.15) Command reception in SBO mode In the SBO receiving stage shown in Figure 3.1-1 we can find three processes: select, cancel, and operate command flows. Reception of “select command” Figure 3.1-2 shows a schematic process flow diagram when receiving a “select command” following the “Wait for a command”.
Page 378 6F2T0200 (0.15) Wait for a command Receiving “Cancel command” Success Return to “Wait Discarding of Cancel logic When Cancel is issued “select command” for a command” “Remote-cancel” from the remote-end Failed When Cancel is issued Do nothing Cancel logic “Local-cancel” from the local-end Figure 3.1-3 Scheme “Cancel command”...
Page 379 6F2T0200 (0.15) Control mode Either Select-Before-operation (SBO) or Direct-Operate-control (DIR) is provided as a control mode for the device. The user can select the preferred control mode. Select-before-operation mode (SBO) 3.2.1 The user should be aware that in the SBO mode a signal is returned from the target device in the form of a response signal, (answer).
Page 380 6F2T0200 (0.15) Server Process IE D (Control function) Target device (SAS) SBOw Selection Command Answer Response Oper. Operation Command Answer Response Figure 3.2-2 SBO with normal security Direct-operation mode (DIR) 3.2.2 In the DIR mode, a target device is controlled without the reception of the select command. An enhanced security mode (DOes) is also provided when the user wishes to control a device with additional security rather than the normal level of security experienced with mode (DOns).
Page 381 6F2T0200 (0.15) IE D Process (Server) Control function Target device Operation Control Command Answer#1 Response Figure 3.2-4 Direct control with normal security GRE200 (1,2) - 362 -...
Page 382 6F2T0200 (0.15) Control hierarchy It is important that the user understand the meaning of the terms ‘control-right’ and ‘control- hierarchy’ in connection with the functioning of the control and monitoring applications in the sub-station automation system (SAS). For instance, when we wish to operate a device (such as a piece of switchgear or others), the system has the device forbidden to operate if the system is unable to give a ‘control-right’...
Page 383 6F2T0200 (0.15) Control level and control point 3.3.1 As shown in Figure 3.3-1, the control hierarchy is distributed across three levels; the network level having a remote-control center (RCC); the station level having operator and engineering work stations (OWS/EWS); and the bay level† having an IED equipped with an LCD screen. One of the three control-points (RCC, OWS/EWS, and LCD) is available to issue a control- command.
Page 384 6F2T0200 (0.15) ○ ○ 1 Checking the bay level 2 Distribution of the control-right RemoteLocalKey_43BCU From LOCMT DIN_UNIT UNIT_TO_BOOL LEDR_CTRL_RIGHT LRSW01_LR_ST DOUT_BOOL DTYPE (530001 3109001001) DTYPE To LEDR 528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT Select condition logic GCNT00_CTRL_RIGHT Operate DOUT_BOOL condition logic DTYPE To GCNT01-32 540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51...
Page 385 6F2T0200 (0.15) LED reset function (LEDR) The IED has a number of LEDs on the front panel. For example, “TRIP” LED is provided as an indicator for tripping operation. The status of the “TRIP LED” is maintained until the user has been able to confirm that tripping was initiated by the IED;...
Page 386 6F2T0200 (0.15) Select logic for resetting LEDs 3.4.1 The user should set scheme switch [LEDDR1] to On prior to the LEDR operation. Figure 3.4-1 shows selection logic in the LEDR function. Wait for a command Wait for a next command Select logic Cancel logic Cancel command...
Page 387 6F2T0200 (0.15) Output signal required mapping (ii) The LEDR function can issue “Select success” signal at the output point “LEDR01_NSD_CSF”, when the LEDR function determines that the input signal “Select command (reset)” is true. If the LEDR function determines that the “LEDR01_NSD_CSF” is not true, the LEDR function returns to the “Wait for a next command”...
Page 388 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 3.4-2 PLC connection point (Input point on select condition logic) Signal Number Signal Name Description 528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LED Reset control hierarchy Table 3.4-3 Setting of LEDR Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value LEDDR1_EN Activate LED reset control Off / On GRE200 (1,2) - 369 -...
Page 389 6F2T0200 (0.15) Cancel logic in SBO mode 3.4.2 In the SBO mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 390 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode 3.4.3 Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic is applied to reset LEDs. Resetting LEDs is executed when the operate conditions are satisfied. Wait for a command Wait for a next command Select logic LED resetting by the remote-end Success...
Page 391 6F2T0200 (0.15) †Note: Although the “LED_RST_COM” signal is connected previously with several LEDs, by the manufacturer, user can also connect the signal with the LEDs. See Chapter 3.4.4 for the way how to connect. Operate condition (iii) Figure 3.4-8 shows the operate condition logic of the LEDR function, which is used to determine a reset-condition for the operation.
Page 392 6F2T0200 (0.15) Settings using GR-TIEMS Figure 3.4-9 shows how to connect the reset signal LED_RST_CMD for the LED-03 logic. The user can assign a reset signal for the respective LED logics by the drag and drop operation. The user should also select Latch for the behavior from the pull-down menu. Set [Behavior] to Latch Choose the signal LED_RST_CMD for the...
Page 393 6F2T0200 (0.15) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 3.4.5 The user can operate the LEDR function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the LEDR function is designed for “LEDRs” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 394 6F2T0200 (0.15) SBOw ✓ Oper ✓ Cancel ✓ Origin ✓ stSeld ✓ sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”) ✓ ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”) ✓ †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down. Figure 3.4-11 LN editing for SBO mode (for example) Defining DIR mode Figure 3.4-12 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as LLN0.
Page 395 6F2T0200 (0.15) are required to be mapped for IEC 61850 communication Table 3.4-4 Mapping signals for SPC object Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orCat orCategory 5280013107011008 LEDR01_ORCAT Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orIdent Octet64 5280016A07011009 LEDR01_ORIDENT Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stVal BOOLEAN 5280013107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs Quality 3010013110041005...
Page 396 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 3.4-5 Mapping signals required for LEDRs object for LLN0 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Timestamp Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Check Check 5280017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs ctlModel...
Page 397 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 3.4.6 TLEDSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note LEDDR1-EN Off / On LEDR01 Reset Control Enable GRE200 (1,2) - 378 -...
Page 398 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 3.4.7 Signal monitoring points ◆ TLEDRSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001) Element ID Name Description 8007011D53 LEDR01_SC Select command 0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD The controllable data is in the status selected (StSeld) 3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD LEDR reset command output 8007011D57 LEDR01_EC Execute command 8007011D55 LEDR01_EC_OWS Execute command by OWS(HMI)
Page 399 6F2T0200 (0.15) Counter function for the general (GCNT) When a signal is generated and it is received by the generic counter function (GCNT), the GCNT function can count the transition of signals. For example, as shown in Figure 3.5-1, a signal is issued repeatedly and if it is required that the number of signals is reported, the GCNT function is able to count the number of signal transitions and report them.
Page 400 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal acquisition timing must be adjusted in accordance with the application, in that the acquisition should be regulated for the nature of the signal; hence, several settings are provided in the GCNT functions. Thirty-two independent GCNT counters† are available. That is, counters GCNT01 to GCNT32†...
Page 401 6F2T0200 (0.15) CNTMAX] and set a user-preferred value. Note that the user can set the maximum number from 9 to 2147483647. Setting the initial-value (iii) The counter returns to an initial-value when the counter reaches the maximum value; generally, the initial-value is set to either zero or one (0 or 1); hence, the number is re-counted from either “0 (or 1)”...
Page 402 6F2T0200 (0.15) Select logics for SBO/DIR modes 3.5.2 The user should set scheme switch [GCNT01-EN] to On prior to counting. Receiving “Select command Reset” from the remote-end Figure 3.5-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command...
Page 403 6F2T0200 (0.15) Input Select logic in GCNT01 Output GCNT01 function (Function ID: 54001) Command “Remote-Reset-Control” For SBO operation 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Select command 1≥ & & To “Wait for a next command” For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command &...
Page 404 6F2T0200 (0.15) Select condition (ii) Figure 3.5-8 shows the select condition logic in the GCNT01 function. When resetting the counter is performed from the “Statics sub-menu” in the HMI operation†, the user should set On for scheme switch [GCNT01-HMI]. Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu †Note: The HMI operation is discussed in (→p.
Page 405 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal name and number (iii) Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for each table: “O” indicates that the signal is provided for optional use. “M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Page 406 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting names (iv) Table 3.5-6 Settings of select logics for GCNT01 to GCNT32 Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value GCNTxx-EN Activation of the GCNTxx function Off / On GCNTxx- Counter is used for the HMI operation in the GCNTxx function Off / On GRE200 (1,2) - 387 -...
Page 407 6F2T0200 (0.15) Cancel logic for SBO mode 3.5.3 In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are satisfied; accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 408 6F2T0200 (0.15) a command is not identical to the “IED test status”. Signal name and number (ii) Table 3.5-7 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ logic) Signal Number Signal Name Description 540001 840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal 540001 840E021E95 GCNT02_CC_SSCN GCNT02 cancel success signal 540001 840E031E95...
Page 409 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes 3.5.4 After the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to clear the counters. Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the remote-end Figure 3.5-10 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command...
Page 410 6F2T0200 (0.15) Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Operate command Reset from the remote-end Select command Success Operation Reset from the Operate logic Signal output Signal reception decision remote-end in the IEC61850 Do nothing Failed Operate command Reset from the local-end Success Operation...
Page 411 6F2T0200 (0.15) Select condition (iii) Similar to the select condition (see Chap.3.5.2(ii)), the GCNT01 function has an operate- condition logic. Figure 3.5-14 shows the operate-condition logic. GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) To operate logic Operate condition 1≥ & Other devices traveling detected*3 Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *4 From Control hierarchy *5...
Page 412 6F2T0200 (0.15) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 3.5.5 The user can operate the GCNT function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the GCNT function is designed for the class of “Integer Status Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 413 6F2T0200 (0.15) Defining SBO mode Figure 3.5-16 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as “GIGO3302”; in the SBO mode, the user should select the following items for the “GIGO3302$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS: SBOw ✓ Oper ✓ Cancel ✓ Origin ✓ stSeld ✓...
Page 414 6F2T0200 (0.15) Mapping output data (ii) The user should group the GCNT01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS (Figure 3.5-18 illustrates how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the GCNT01 function are required to map the IEC 61850 communications.
Page 415 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 3.5-10 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO3302 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Timestamp Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Check Check 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO...
Page 416 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 3.5.6 GENCNT (Function ID: 540001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note GCNT01-EN Off / On - Switch for counter01 GCNT02-EN Off / On - Switch for counter02 GCNT03-EN Off / On - Switch for counter03 …. ….
Page 417 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 3.5.7 Signal monitoring points in GCNT01 ◆ GENCNT (Function ID: 540001) Element ID Name Description 000E001F41 GCNT00_CCTRL_COUNTER GCNT00 cmnctrl counter correction summarize 800E001D58 GCNT00_CH_EC_LCD GCNT00 count change execute command by LCD 800E001D5E GCNT00_CH_EC_OWS GCNT00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI) 800E001D5F GCNT00_CH_EC_RCC GCNT00 count change execute command by RCC...
Page 418 6F2T0200 (0.15) “GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” by using the following steps: Step 1 Find the element ID for GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN (i.e., “890E011EA2”) Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”) Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for the 2 device) Step 4...
Page 419 6F2T0200 (0.15) Mode control function (MDCTRL) The mode control (MDCTRL) function provides an interface; it can inform a command of changing a mode for a test function (TEST-FB). The MDCTRL function is made of two parts: (1) sensing either an On-mode or a Test-mode in the IED and (2) interface between the IED and the SAS.
Page 420 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function 3.6.1 Mode sensor The MDCTRL function can monitor the state change (On to TEST / TEST to Off) in the IED. To use this monitoring function, On should be set for the scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to operation.
Page 421 6F2T0200 (0.15) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 3.6.2 The user can operate the MDCTRL function over the IEC61850 communication after the mapping using GR-TIEMS. The user should follow steps, Step1: Editing Logical Node Step2: Mapping output data Step3: Mapping input data Editing Logical Node The user should make a logical node (LN) for the MDCTRL function.
Page 422 6F2T0200 (0.15) SBOw Oper Cancel Origin stSeld sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”) ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” ) †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down. Figure 3.6-2 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example) Defining DIR mode Figure 3.6-3 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the DIR mode is required for the MDCTRL01 function.
Page 423 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 3.6-3 Mapping signals for MOD object. Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name System/LLN0$Mod$origin orCat orCategory 5500013013011000 MDCTRL01_ORCAT System/LLN0$Mod$origin orIdent Octet64 5500016A13011009 MDCTRL01_ORIDENT System/LLN0$Mod stSeld BOOLEAN 5500010013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT Drag and drop Figure 3.6-4 orCat attribute mapped into MOD object of LLNO Mapping input data (iii) The MDCTRL01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel.
Page 424 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 3.6-4 Mapping signals required for LLNO object in MDCTRL01 function Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlVal System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlNum INT8U System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Timestamp System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Test BOOLEAN System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Check Check System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlVal System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlNum...
Page 425 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 3.6.3 MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note MDCTRL-EN Off/On Switch for Mode change operation MDCTRL-SELRST 10-100 s Selection cancel time-out timer MDCTRL-EXERST 10-100 s Waiting execute operation time-out timer Commissioning and !Note: The user can set an item on Test sub-menu (see Chapter maintenance: Test operations →p.
Page 426 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 3.6.4 Signal monitoring point ◆ MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001) Element ID Name Description 8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI) 8013011D56 MDCTRL01_EC_RCC MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC 8013011D57 MDCTRL01_EC_RMT MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote 2013011001 MDCTRL01_MODE MDCTRL01 mode 8013011D51 MDCTRL01_SC_OWS MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
Page 427 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001) Element ID Name Description 8113011E82 MODE01_OEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command OK condition signal 8F13011F43 MODE01_OSD_CSF MDCTRL01 Test direction selected condition signal 8513011F65 MODE01_OSL_CS40 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 40 8813011F5D MODE01_OSL_CS41 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 41...
Page 428 6F2T0200 (0.15) Local, remote and PLC control The user can select either local or remote control by pressing the L │ R key on the front panel of the IED. Selection is executed within the LOCRMT function. Control logic is provided by default, but the user can customize each application using the PLC function and PLC connection points.
Page 429 6F2T0200 (0.15) Local control 3.7.1 Local control refers to control operation from the front panel of the IED. Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user. Remote control 3.7.2 Remote control refers to control operation from a remote control center or the SAS server. Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user.
Page 430 6F2T0200 (0.15) DPOS User’s PLC logic PLC connection point Figure 3.7-2 Example of user-preferred control scheme using PLC user logic Note: The user-preferred control scheme implemented by users can only be operated in the DIR mode. GRE200 (1,2) - 411 -...
Page 431 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal for Local/Remote control 3.7.4 Note: The meaning of the following references are used in the column “M/O” in Tables Table 3.7-2, Table 3.7-3, and Table 3.7-4: “O” means the signal is optional. “M” means the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Page 432 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 3.7.5 Signal monitoring points ◆ LOCRMT (Function ID: 530001) Element ID Name Description 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST S43BCU state 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT S43BCU state for SAS Connection points in PLC logic ◆ LOCRMT (Function ID: 530001) Element ID Name Description 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 PLC signal 1(PLC use)
Page 433 6F2T0200 (0.15) Common controls (CMNCTRL) The CMNCTRL is served as a mediator to provide a bridge between functions. Double command blocking (DCB) 3.8.1 For control functions, the operating principle is that priority is given to the first command received and shall be executed first. In other words, successive commands received do not have the right to run until the first command received has failed to complete its operation (that is, the principle of double command blocking (DCB) is established).
Page 434 6F2T0200 (0.15) Ring LAN network constructed for the SAS stVal message IED-2 IED-3 IED-10 IED-1 CB10 Figure 3.8-2 Sending and reception of stVal message Figure 3.8-3 demonstrates how the GOOSE publish destination is set with regard to the DCB message. The user is required to set the destination for each respective IED by selecting the signal “DCB SND OR”, corresponding to the GOOSE publish, this must be performed at the respective screens in GR-TIEMS†.
Page 435 SCS_ORIDENT 5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM †Note: The user should recognize that the reason messages are only available for operation with the GCS1000 control system manufactured by Toshiba. Miscellaneous settings 3.8.4 The CMNCTRL1 function has the following five common settings: 1. Control direction: The [SDCEN] can configure the control directions of the DPOS function.
Page 436 6F2T0200 (0.15) made, the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting time [EXEWAIT] if the control result is not received at the IED from the target device. The setting time ranges from 30 to 300sec. in 1 sec. steps. 5.
Page 437 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 3.8.5 CMNCTRL (FunctionID:5A0001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note SDCEN Off / On - Setting of the control to the same direction CNTRV 0 - 1 - Next value of the counter[CNTVALMAX] level 30 - 300 - Selection cancel time-out timer EXEWAIT 30 - 300...
Page 438 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 3.8.6 PLC connection points ◆ CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001) Element ID Name Description 800800EDE1 ADD_DCB_SND Additional condition for double command blocking 800800EFB7 LAN_CONN_FAIL_IN 800800EF40 PLC_I_001 PLC event information 1 800800EF41 PLC_I_002 PLC event information 2 800800EF42 PLC_I_003 PLC event information 3 800800EF43 PLC_I_004...
Page 439 6F2T0200 (0.15) PLC monitoring point ◆ CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001) Element ID Name Description 0008001FB3 PLC_O_100 PLC event output 100 PLC connection points ◆ CMNCTRL 2(Function ID: 5A0101) Element ID Name Description 320000EF43 CHK_NMI_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal1 320001EF43 CHK_ROMRAM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal2 320002EF43 CHK_SUM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal3...
Page 440 6F2T0200 (0.15) PLC monitoring point ◆ CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001) Element ID Name Description 000013EF42 PLC_BOOL_14 PLC event bool information 14 000014EF42 PLC_BOOL_15 PLC event bool information 15 320014EF43 PLC_UINT32_15 PLC event uint32 information 15 320015EF43 PLC_UINT32_16 PLC event uint32 information 16 320016EF43 PLC_UINT32_17 PLC event uint32 information 17...
Page 441 6F2T0200 (0.15) PLC monitoring point ◆ CMNCTRL 2(Function ID: 5A0101) Element ID Name Description 0000121F42 PLC_O_BOOL_13 PLC event bool output 13 0000131F42 PLC_O_BOOL_14 PLC event bool output 14 0000141F42 PLC_O_BOOL_15 PLC event bool output 15 8000001F40 PLC_O_BIT_001 PLC event bit output 1 8000011F40 PLC_O_BIT_002 PLC event bit output 2...
Page 442 6F2T0200 (0.15) Control and monitoring application Contents Pages Pages Double positions device ctrl.(DPOS) Software interlock(ILK) -Setup for BIO modules -Interlock specification -Select logic -Interlock formula “On” target selected from the remote -Interlock method “On” target selected at the local -ILK configuration “On”...
Page 443 6F2T0200 (0.15) Double position device function (DPOS) The double position device (DPOS) function is used when the user wishes to control a device having On and Off states, which is equivalent to controlling a device from the “Closed” or “Open” condition;...
Page 444 6F2T0200 (0.15) Select logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.1.1 The user should set scheme switch [DPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to DPOS01 operation. Table 4.1-9 shows all of the scheme switches in the DPOS function. Receiving “Select command On” from the remote-end Figure 4.1-1 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’...
Page 445 6F2T0200 (0.15) Select logic in DPOS01 Output Input DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) Command “Remote-On-Control” For SBO operation 512001_7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command & 1≥ & with ILK† condition To “Wait for a next command” For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command &...
Page 446 6F2T0200 (0.15) Receiving “Select command Off” from the remote-end (ii) Figure 4.1-3 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Select command On from the remote-end Cancel command Select command Off from the remote-end Failed...
Page 447 6F2T0200 (0.15) Input Selection logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) Command “Remote-Off-Control” For SBO operation 512001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command & 1≥ & with ILK† condition For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command & with ILK† condition “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”...
Page 448 6F2T0200 (0.15) Receiving “Select command On” from the local-end (iii) Figure 4.1-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘On’ from the local-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Cancel command Select command On from the remote-end Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel logic Select command On from the local-end...
Page 449 6F2T0200 (0.15) Selection logic in DPOS01 Output Input DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) For SBO operation Select command Command “Local-On-Control” 1≥ with ILK† condition & & To “Wait for a next For DIR operation command” Operate command To BO connection with ILK†...
Page 450 6F2T0200 (0.15) Receiving “Select command Off” from the local-end (iv) Figure 4.1-7 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ from the local-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Select command On from the remote-end Cancel command Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel logic...
Page 451 6F2T0200 (0.15) Selection logic in DPOS01 Output Input DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) For SBO operation Command “Local-Off-Control” Select command 1≥ & & with ILK† condition For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command ILK† condition (“Off”) passed with ILK† condition &...
Page 452 6F2T0200 (0.15) Receiving “Select command On” by PLC function Figure 4.1-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ by the PLC function. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Cancel command Select command On from the remote-end Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel logic Select command On from the local-end...
Page 453 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) 1≥ & To “Wait for a next ON-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation command” (PLC #1 connection point) Operate command To BO connection 512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK with ILK†...
Page 454 6F2T0200 (0.15) Receiving “Select command Off” by PLC function (vi) Figure 4.1-11 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Cancel command Select command On from the remote-end Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel logic...
Page 455 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals from user PLC logic Select logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) 1≥ & OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation (PLC#1 connection point) Operate command with To BO connection 512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK ILK† condition &...
Page 456 6F2T0200 (0.15) Select condition (vii) Figure 4.1-13 shows the select condition logic in the DPOS01 function. The DPOS01 function checks the condition for the Select command using the signal “DPOS1_3PH_STATE” (see Table 4.1-31). If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, the following alternatives are available: The user can replace the original logic with alternative logic, The user can add additional logic to the original logic.
Page 457 6F2T0200 (0.15) DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) 1≥ 1≥ & & Double Command Blocking detected*1 DCB RCV OR To select logic Other devices traveling detected*2 Unmatched condition detected *4 Select condition Traveling OR Event suppression detected *5 = DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP From TRC*3 General trip (512001 8103011F5F) GEN.
Page 458 6F2T0200 (0.15) operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch [SCDEN], the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction (i.e., when on (off) is performed sequentially).
Page 459 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal name and number (viii) Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for each table: “O” indicated that the signal is provided for optional use. “M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Page 460 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 4.1-4 Mapping points for the reception of control commands Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) 512001 7003026D08 DEV02_CONTROL_REQ DPOS02 control command received. (Mapping Data) 512001 7003036D08 DEV03_CONTROL_REQ DPOS03 control command received. (Mapping Data) …...
Page 461 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 4.1-8 PLC Monitoring points (On/Off output-signal for BIO) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 8A03011DC4 DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select (Off) command for Binary Output. 512001 8A03021DC4 DPOS02_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS02 select (Off) command for Binary Output. 512001 8A03031DC4 DPOS03_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS03 select (Off) command for Binary Output. ….
Page 462 6F2T0200 (0.15) Cancel logic for SBO mode 4.1.2 In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel conditions are satisfied, accordingly the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 463 6F2T0200 (0.15) 510001 7001016D08 Input Cancel logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) To “Wait for a command” Command “Remote-cancel” “DPOS01_ CC_SS” Cancel command (512001_8603011E95) 510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ & Successes to cancel & Cancel condition† “Do nothing” “DPOS01_CC_FS” (512001_8703011E96) Operation Failed Figure 4.1-15 ‘Cancel’...
Page 464 6F2T0200 (0.15) 510001 7001016D08 Input Cancel logic in DPOS01 Output To “Wait for a command” DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “DPOS01_ CC_SS” Cancel command (512001_8603011E95) Command “Local-cancel” & Successes of cancel “Do nothing” & Cancel condition “DPOS01_CC_FS” (512001_8703011E96) Operation Failed Figure 4.1-17 ‘Cancel’...
Page 465 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal name and number (iv) Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for each table: “O” indicates that the signal is provided for the optional use. “M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure using the signal; otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Page 466 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.1.3 Once the operation of the select logic is complete, the operate logic start to control the device. Receiving “Operate command On” from the remote-end Figure 4.1-19 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command...
Page 467 6F2T0200 (0.15) Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7F) DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS” (512001 8103011E82) Command “Remote-On-Control” [DPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 512001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ with ILK † condition 1≥ & 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd.
Page 468 6F2T0200 (0.15) 4.1-13 for PLC#1, Table 4.1-14 for PLC#2, Table 4.1-17 and Table 4.1-19 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected when ‡‡ the time set by the [DPOS01-RST] has been reached. Receiving “Operate command Off”...
Page 469 6F2T0200 (0.15) Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7E) DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS” (512001 8003011E81) Command “Remote-Off-Control” [DPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 512001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ with ILK † condition 1≥ & 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd.
Page 470 6F2T0200 (0.15) 4.1-14 for PLC#2, Table 4.1-15 for PLC#3, Table 4.1-17 and Table 4.1-19 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until ‡‡ after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST]. Receiving “Operate command On”...
Page 471 6F2T0200 (0.15) To BO connection Operate logic in DPOS01 Output Input “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7F) DPOS1 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS” (512001 8103011E82) Operate Cmd. Command “Local-On-Control” [DPOS01-CPW] † with ILK condition 1≥ & 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Cmd.
Page 472 6F2T0200 (0.15) 4.1-13 for PLC#1, Table 4.1-14 for PLC#2, Table 4.1-17 and Table 4.1-19 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until ‡‡ after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST]. Receiving “Operate command Off”...
Page 473 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operate logic in DPOS01 Output Input “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7E) DPOS1 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS” Operate Cmd. (512001 8003011E81) Command “Local-Off-Control” [DPOS01-CPW] with ILK † condition 1≥ & 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Cmd.
Page 474 6F2T0200 (0.15) 4.1-14 for PLC#2, Table 4.1-15 for PLC#3, Table 4.1-17 and Table 4.1-19 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until ‡‡ after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST]. Receiving “Operate command On”...
Page 475 6F2T0200 (0.15) Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7F) DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS” Command “PLC-On-Control” requiring ILK† check (512001 8103011E82) (PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK with ILK † condition 1≥ &...
Page 476 6F2T0200 (0.15) Note: To identify the input and output signal-points in the other DPOS logics, see Table †† 4.1-13 for PLC#1, Table 4.1-14 for PLC#2, Table 4.1-17 and Table 4.1-19 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected ‡‡...
Page 477 6F2T0200 (0.15) Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS” Command “PLC-On-Control” with ILK† (512001 8003011E7E) (512001 8003011E81) (PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK with ILK † condition 1≥ & 1≥...
Page 478 6F2T0200 (0.15) Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table †† 4.1-14 for PLC#2, Table 4.1-15 for PLC#3, Table 4.1-17 and Table 4.1-19 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until ‡‡...
Page 479 6F2T0200 (0.15) DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) 1≥ 1≥ & & Double Command Blocking detected*1 DCB RCV OR To selection logic Other devices traveling detected*2 Operate condition Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *4 Event suppression detected *5 From TRC*3 = DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP General trip (512001 8103011F5F) GEN.
Page 480 6F2T0200 (0.15) Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the operation- direction of logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch [SCDEN], operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction.
Page 481 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 4.1-16 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 and PLC#2 for additional and operate condition) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 800301EE65 DPOS01IN_TMP_38 DPOS01 user additional condition(PLC#1) 512001 800302EE65 DPOS02IN_TMP_38 DPOS02 user additional condition(PLC#1) 512001 800303EE65 DPOS03IN_TMP_38 DPOS03 user additional condition(PLC#1) …...
Page 482 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 4.1-19 PLC monitoring points (Output signals for response) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 8003011E93 DPOS01_EX_CMP DPOS01 completed control 512001 8003021E93 DPOS02_EX_CMP DPOS02 completed control 512001 8003031E93 DPOS03_EX_CMP DPOS03 completed control … … … 512001 8003481E93 DPOS72_EX_CMP DPOS72 completed control 512001 8603011E91 DPOS01_EX_FFL...
Page 483 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation counter 4.1.4 The DPOS01 function has an operation-counter†; the user can utilize the operation-counter to predict the lifespan of switchgear and other functions. The user can select a count mode using a setting. Table 4.1-21 and Figure 4.1-32 show the modes, for which a user is required to change a mode in response to a device signal.
Page 484 6F2T0200 (0.15) Receiving “change value for counter” from the remote-end Mapping of Input signal required Figure 4.1-34 depicts the logic when a command “change value for counter” is received at the DPOS01 logic. With regard three-phase counter, input-point “DEV01_3PH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. With regard to a phase-A counter, the input-point “DEV01_APH_CONTROL_REQ”...
Page 485 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operate condition for the counter (iii) Figure 4.1-36 illustrates the operate condition logic. The DPOS01 function can determine an operate-condition using a signal received from “Control-hierarchy”. The control-hierarchy condition is provided by user-programmed PLC logic; the user must connect the control- hierarchy with the DPOS01 function using connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28”...
Page 486 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 7003026D0B DEV02_BPH_REQ DPOS02 change command received. (Mapping Data) for B-phase counter value 512001 7003036D0B DEV03_BPH_REQ DPOS03 change command received. (Mapping Data) for B-phase counter value … … …. 512001 7003486D0B DEV72_BPH_REQ DPOS72 change command received. (Mapping Data) for B-phase counter value 512001 7003016D0C DEV01_CPH_REQ DPOS01 change command received.
Page 487 6F2T0200 (0.15) Measurement of operation intervals 4.1.5 The DPOS01 function can measure operation intervals (OT1 to OT4) †; the intervals OT1 to OT2 can represent the period of time when a switch changes from “Closed” to “open”. In the DPOS01 function, the operation period is grouped into sub-time periods, as shown in Table 4.1-25.
Page 488 6F2T0200 (0.15) The user can clear the intervals (OT1 to OT4) by key-operation of the “Operation time” User interface: sub-menu Figure 4.1-39 or operation from the remote-end. See chapter Monitoring sub-menu (→p. 869). Operation Time DPOS1-OT1 10:48 1/73 10:48 _DPOS1-OT >...
Page 489 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setup for BIO module 4.1.6 The user should connect the DPOS input/output points with the BI and the BO circuits; subsequently, the DPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. In order to set up the DPOS function the user should execute the following four steps. BI connection for status signal BO connection for “Select command On/Off”...
Page 490 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals from the BI circuit and DPOS01 Signal acquisition logic in DPOS01 Output ‡ devices To select and operate DPOS01 condition logics “DPOS01_3PH_STATE” (512001 3103011001) Phase-A signals BI signal selected by setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG] N/O contact Event & signal Suppression &...
Page 491 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals from the BI circuit and DPOS01 Signal acquisition logic in DPOS01 Output ‡ devices To select and operate DPOS01 condition logics “DPOS01_3PH_STATE” (512001 3103011001) Single phase signals BI signal selected by setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG] N/O contact Event & signal Suppression &...
Page 492 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 4.1-42 shows that the iterative signals received from the device have been suppressed by the event suppression function. The suppression commences on receipt of the seventh signal (at Time B). This is because the function can count the iterative number of incoming signals.
Page 493 6F2T0200 (0.15) “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” and “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”. BO connection for “Operate command On/Off” (iii) Figure 4.1-44 exemplifies the connection for operate command On/Off. Suppose that connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection points “DPOS01_OEX_BO” and “DPOS01_FEX_BO”; as a result, the “Operate command On” and the “Operate command Off” signals are issued at BO3 and BO4 respectively.
Page 494 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting for “Select command On” For example, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing of the command; the user can connect point “BO1-RB” with the contact health check function using the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]. Do not key the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG”. Selecte logic in DPOS01 Contact health check...
Page 495 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting for “Operate command On” Similarly, the point “BO3-RB” must be applied for the setting [DPOS01-OEXBORD]. Operate logic in DPOS01 Contact health check “ DPOS01_OEX_BO ” logic in DPOS01 “510001_8201011DD3” Result of contact health check & BO3circuit at IO#1-2 “...
Page 496 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1) Figure 4.1-49 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands drive the BO1 to BO4 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table 4.1-28, to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
Page 497 6F2T0200 (0.15) Settings for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2) Figure 4.1-50 shows a setting example of an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The settings are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 4.1-29, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead BO1 is actually chosen, which is incorrect.
Page 498 6F2T0200 (0.15) Settings for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3) Figure 4.1-51 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is made hypothetically. That is, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD];...
Page 499 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal name and number Table 4.1-31 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in DPOSxx) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state 512001 3103021001 DPOS02_3PH_STATE DPOS02 3ph_state 512001 3103031001 DPOS03_3PH_STATE DPOS03 3ph_state …. ….
Page 500 6F2T0200 (0.15) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 4.1.7 The user can operate the DPOS function over IEC 61850 communications following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the DPOS function is designed for the class of “Double Point Controller (DPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 501 6F2T0200 (0.15) Defining SBO mode Figure 4.1-53 exemplifies the DPOS01 logic node saved as “CSWI4”. In the SBO mode, the user should select the following items for the “CSWI4$Pos” using GR-TIEMS: SBOw ✓ Oper ✓ Cancel ✓ Origin ✓ stSeld ✓...
Page 502 6F2T0200 (0.15) Mapping output data (ii) The user should group the DPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. (Figure 4.1-55 illustrates how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the DPOS01 function are required to map for IEC 61850 communications.
Page 503 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 4.1-35 Mapping signals required for DPC object for CSWI4 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Timestamp Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Check Check Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper...
Page 504 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 4.1.8 DPOS01(Function ID: 512001) at Change Over Switch Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Commo n DPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time DPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock DPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock...
Page 505 6F2T0200 (0.15) DPOS01(Function ID: 512001) at Change Over Switch Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note FixedLogic / DPOS01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic FixedLogic / DPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic FixedLogic / Change logic about execute command fail DPOS01-LGEXFFCT FixedLogic factor...
Page 506 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 4.1.9 Signal monitoring points in DPOS01 ◆ DPOS01(Function ID: 512001) Element ID Name Description 8003011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state 3103011FE5 DPOS01_APH_STATE DPOS01 aph_state 3103011FEA DPOS01_BPH_STATE DPOS01 bph_state 8603011F7B DPOS01_CNT_CS07 DPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal 0003011D91 DPOS01_CNT_SEL DPOS01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS...
Page 507 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring points in DPOS01 ◆ DPOS01(Function ID: 512001) Element ID Name Description 8003011E7D DPOS01_SLR_CS DPOS01 select release condition signal 8303011D02 DPOS01_ST_OFF DPOS01 Normal open state 8103011D03 DPOS01_ST_ON DPOS01 Normal close state 0003011D95 DPOS01_TMP_02 DPOS01 time reset selected signal(stSeld) for SAS 3103011D80 DPOS01_TMP_06 DPOS01 control event data (selected)
Page 508 6F2T0200 (0.15) Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1 device, but a 2 and other devices are also provided in the DPOS function. We have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve readability.
Page 509 6F2T0200 (0.15) Software interlock function (ILK) Devices must be controlled in accordance with the prevailing operational condition of the electric power system. If a device does not act or behave in accordance with the operational circumstances, inappropriate device control can result in outages or fatal incidents for the network.
Page 510 6F2T0200 (0.15) Device Binary Circuit input Control Interlock Control breaker Device status Device status circuits Functions Device status Function (ILK) (CB) DPOS Binary Interlock OK/ NG decision Dis- Output connector circuits (DS) Database Device control Control Other IE Ds GOOSE GOOSE receiving information GOOSE subscription...
Page 511 6F2T0200 (0.15) Busbar1-A Busbar2-A F52VT F27L Figure 4.2-2 Example of device status and Interlock-check In accordance with the arrangement of the devices shown in Figure 4.2-2, interlock-check formulae can be configured from equations (4.2-1) to (4.2-9). The status of respective devices, (stVal) and interlock operators (“•”...
Page 512 6F2T0200 (0.15) Closing Blocking: State of Protection lockout relay (“Off” state means active.) F27L: State of under voltage relay (“On” state means no voltage.) F52VT: State of VT MCB switch Sign “•”: Interlock operator “AND” Sign “+”: Interlock operator “OR” †Note: When CB (��0) is open, logic level of ��0 ̅̅̅̅...
Page 513 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 4.2-1 Names of operators used in the Interlock-check formulae Sign of Example of Interlock interlock Description‡ interlock operator operator formula† If both input signals are “1”, the resultant AND(•) output signal is “1”. If not, the output signal Q1 •...
Page 514 6F2T0200 (0.15) Nodes and formulae for interlock-check (ii) Figure 4.2-4 illustrates that an interlock-check is realized by using a number of nodes. For each node, the user is required to configure input signals, interlock-operators, and links between nodes. Following that, an interlock-check can be run. Node #1 Node #2 Node #7...
Page 515 6F2T0200 (0.15) Purpose of Quality information in the output signal (iii) In the output signal, the quality information will affect the control of the device. Table 4.2-2 shows four types of output signal. When the quality information (Quality) of an output signal issued by a node is indicated as being “NG”, it signifies that device control is forbidden.
Page 516 6F2T0200 (0.15) used for ‘Quality’ can be found immediately below Table 4.2-2. AND (• ) stVal Input(A) Quality stVal Output Quality stVal Input(B) Quality Figure 4.2-5 Logic of interlock operator (AND) and Input/Output signals OR interlock operator When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “OR”, the quality information is affected by device status (stVal).
Page 517 6F2T0200 (0.15) For example, when the interlock operator “OR” has two input signals (0–NG, 0–OK), it has to generate a signal (0–NG) using the equations (4.2-13) and (4.2-14). This is because the quality “NG (i.e., 1)” and the quality “OK (i.e., 0)” are entered into the OR operator; the OR operator produces one (1) which is defined as “NG”...
Page 518 6F2T0200 (0.15) COMP interlock operator When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “COMP”, the “COMP” operator outputs the original quality information intact. That is, the “COMP” interlock operator outputs quality information, which is not influenced by device status (stVal). Table 4.2-6 shows two input-signals (A and B) and the output signal for the “COMP”...
Page 519 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 4.2-7 Signals generated in control functions Control Device status generated by the control “stVal” transposed in the node function function described on the left column 0x40(Open) 0† 0x40‡ 1§ DPOS 0x80(Close) 1† 0x80‡ 0§ “device status” except “0x40” and “0x80” 0(off) signal †Note: Values are altered when “AND”, “OR”, or “NOT”...
Page 520 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 4.2.5 Signal monitoring point ◆ INTERLOCK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 3100A11001 ILK_MID_UPDATING ILK condition number during counting 3103011DA0 DPOS01-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV01 3103011DA2 DPOS01-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV01 3103021DA0 DPOS02-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV02...
Page 521 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ INTERLOCK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 3103161DA0 DPOS22-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV22 3103161DA2 DPOS22-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV22 3103171DA0 DPOS23-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV23 3103171DA2 DPOS23-CLOSE...
Page 522 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ INTERLOCK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 31032C1DA0 DPOS44-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV44 31032C1DA2 DPOS44-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV44 31032D1DA0 DPOS45-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV45 31032D1DA2 DPOS45-CLOSE...
Page 523 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ INTERLOCK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 3103421DA0 DPOS66-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV66 3103421DA2 DPOS66-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV66 3103431DA0 DPOS67-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV67 3103431DA2 DPOS67-CLOSE...
Page 524 6F2T0200 (0.15) Technical Description Contents Pages Pages Binary IO modules (BIO) Keys Binary input circuit (BI) ENTER, CANCEL, I, O, CLEAR keys Independent negative terminal Generation of binary signal (for testing) Common negative terminal L/R key (Remote or local selection) Binary output circuit (BO) Screen jump Normal type...
Page 525 6F2T0200 (0.15) IED hardware overview The IED hardware consists of a case, modules, and a human machine interface (HMI). For instance, Figure 5.1-1 shows the structure of the GRE-series IED which will be covered with 1/3×19” case. It consists of a transformer module (VCT), a signal processing and communication module (CPU), binary input and output modules (BIO), and human machine interface (HMI).
Page 526 6F2T0200 (0.15) Case and module slot 1/3 size case 5.2.1 Unit structure The unit structure is shown in Figure 5.2-1 (a). A unit is made of VCT, CPU, and BIO module. They are joined using the front panel (HMI). A case will be used to cover the unit. USB port is provided for the maintenance.
Page 527 6F2T0200 (0.15) 1/2 size case 5.2.2 Unit structure The unit structure is shown in Figure 5.2-2 (a). A unit is made of VCT, CUP and BIO modules. They are jointed using HMI front panel. A case will be used to cover the unit. UBS port is provided for the maintenance.
Page 528 6F2T0200 (0.15) Rated Frequency and Rated current The user can select the rated frequency (either 50Hz or 60Hz) and the rated current (either 1A or 5A) with settings [Rated Frequency] and [Rated Current]. The user must select rated current and frequency to match the system. The setting menus on LCD screen are shown below. AC Analog Input System parameter 10:48...
Page 529 6F2T0200 (0.15) Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT) The transformer module (VCT) is used to get the power system quantities. A safety feature is available such that all of the VCT current inputs are shorted when a VCT module is removed from the IED case.
Page 530 6F2T0200 (0.15) VCT types 5.4.1 There are two types (VCT3A and VCT3B) and one type is selected depending on the relay applications. Note: VCT3A is selected for the IED hardware model GRE200-1 (which can be read from an ordering code position “7” of hardware). Conversely, VCT3B is selected for the Chapter Installation and replacement model GRE200-2.
Page 531 6F2T0200 (0.15) VCT3B (ii) Figure 5.4-3 shows the VCT3B type, which agrees with five voltages and four currents inputs. VCT3B Current Terminal Types of AC analog input screw Input signals Current inputs channels numbers Current Current I L1 Current Current I L2 Current I L3...
Page 532 6F2T0200 (0.15) VCT constitution 5.4.2 Figure 5.4-4 shows VCT terminal block and its schematic diagram (positioned at ‘VC’). The same numbers are shown on screws on the left and the right. Terminal label Module type VC terminal Schematic diagram Figure 5.4-4 VCT terminals (Conceptual diagrams) GRE200 (1,2) - 513 -...
Page 533 6F2T0200 (0.15) VCT ratio setting 5.4.3 VCT ratio shall be agreed with the VTs and CTs on the transmission line. The user shall set ratio values for VTs and CTs. Setting VT ratio A ratio of the primary voltage to the secondary voltage should be set for the VT. Find the channel number corresponding to the VT.
Page 534 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection styles and polarity 5.4.4 In order that the relay can run in versatile environment, flexible operations are permitted on the circuits of VCT; one of styles should be selected depending on the connection of CT/VT and polarity. A style is determined by the required connection, which is equal to the actual wiring. Figure 5.4-5 shows menus on the LCD screens about the styles and CT priorities settings.
Page 535 6F2T0200 (0.15) CTs for three phase currents Depending on actual CTs arrangements, the user can select a style among No. 101–104. Find a matching style and define it by settings [Conn-CT] and [2P_Type]. Table 5.4-2 Connection styles for CTs for three phase currents Combination settings Connection styles Wiring examples...
Page 536 6F2T0200 (0.15) CT for zero-phase sequence current (ii) Regarding zero-phase sequence current†, the user can select a style among No.111–113. Find a matching style and define it by setting [Conn-IeCT]. Table 5.4-3 Connection styles for CT for zero-phase sequence current Connection styles Setting [Conn-IeCT] Wiring examples...
Page 537 6F2T0200 (0.15) CT for zero-phase sequence current for SEF (iii) Regarding zero-phase sequence current† for SEF‡, the user can select a style among No.121– 122. Find a matching style and define it by setting [Conn-IseCT]. Table 5.4-4 Connection styles for CT for zero-phase current for SEF Setting Connection styles Wiring examples...
Page 538 6F2T0200 (0.15) VT connection style 5.4.6 Similarly, VT connections are dependent on the VT arrangements. Styles No. 201–222 are provided. VTs for three phase voltages Depending on actual VTs arrangement, the user can select a style among No. 201–207. Find a matching style and define it by setting [Conn-VT].
Page 539 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting Connection styles Wiring examples [Conn-VT] 2 phase-phase voltages (Vab and Vbc) inputted to VT-V and V Busbar A B C To input 2 phase-phase voltages from 2 phase-phase VTs Phase-ground voltage inputted to VT-V Busbar To input of 1 phase-ground voltage from 1 phase-ground VT Phase-phase voltage inputted to VT-V...
Page 540 6F2T0200 (0.15) VT for zero-phase sequence voltage (ii) Regarding zero-phase sequence voltage†, the user can select a style of either No.211 or 212. Find a matching style and define it by setting [Conn-VeVT]. Table 5.4-6 Connection styles for VT for zero-phase sequence voltage Setting Connection styles Wiring examples...
Page 541 6F2T0200 (0.15) CT polarity 5.4.7 CTs for phase current Table 5.4-8 shows CT polarity can be converted when Negative is set for [Pol-CT]. When polarity conversion is not required, Positive should be set (default setting). Table 5.4-8 CT polarity styles of CTs for phase current Polarity Setting Wiring examples...
Page 542 6F2T0200 (0.15) (ii) CT for zero-phase sequence current Setting [Pol-IeCT]=Negative permits inverted connection for zero-sequence phase current Ie. Table 5.4-9 CT polarity styles of CT for zero-phase sequence current Polarity Setting Wiring examples [Pol-IeCT] Style Busbar Busbar A B C A B C Positive Positive...
Page 543 6F2T0200 (0.15) (iii) CT for zero-phase sequence current for SEF If the sensitive earth fault (SEF) function is provided, VCT will have Ise terminal. The user can convert the polarity with setting [Pol-IseCT]=Negative. Table 5.4-10 CT polarity styles of CT for zero-phase sequence current for SEF Polarity Setting Wiring examples...
Page 544 6F2T0200 (0.15) Electric quantity definitions 5.4.8 Electric quantities, such as current/voltage/power (Ia, Va, P, etc.), are presented and determined with CT/VT connection styles, as discussed in preceding sections. This section groups the electrical quantities by the settings, which can allow calculate properly. Current components handed in IED Handling currents in the IED are grouped and summarized (see Chap.
Page 545 6F2T0200 (0.15) Voltage components handled in IED (ii) Similarity, handling voltages are summarized in Table 5.4-13, which can be grouped with VT connection styles (see Chap. 5.4.6). For example, if the IED has setting [Conn-VT]=3PN, applied voltages at V terminals, they are converted for Va, Vb, and Vc, respectively. Additionally, phase-to-phase voltages, V can be introduced using the below equations:...
Page 546 6F2T0200 (0.15) Power components handled in IED (iii) Power components (active ‘P’, reactive ‘Q’, and apparent ‘S’) are introduced with the current and voltage components, which are defined by VT connection styles (see Chap. 5.4.5 and 5.4.6). Table 5.4-14 shows the power components that will be defined by the settings [Conn-CT] and [Conn-VT].
Page 547 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal processing and communication module (CPU and COM) Signal-processing and communication module (CPU) is made with a main circuit board (CP1M) and communication ‘piggyback’ circuit boards (COM#1 to COM#3). COM#1 and COM#2 are provided for LAN communication (Ethernet). On the other hand, optional COM#3 can be chosen for the expansion, such as time synchronization, optical links etc.
Page 548 6F2T0200 (0.15) Communication modules 5.5.2 LAN communication The tables below show LAN modules, which are located at C1 and C2 for dual ports (see Figure 5.5-5). The type of modules is selected with an ordering number. Table 5.5-1 LAN communication modules for COM#1 and COM#2 Type 100Base-TX/1000Base-T 100Base-FX module...
Page 549 6F2T0200 (0.15) Optional communication (ii) The table below shows optional modules, used for such as time synchronization, data transfer of Modbus and IEC60870-5-103 connection. Table 5.5-2 Optional modules for COM#3 100Base-TX/ Type IRIG-B RS485 Fiber optic 1000Base-T Connector PCB connector PCB connector ST type RJ45...
Page 550 6F2T0200 (0.15) with a shielded-twisted-pair cable. The terminal arrangement and references are shown below. The cable sheath should be connected with the case frame ground (FG). To use a shielded-twisted-pair cable, the total length should be less than 1200 meter (0.75 miles); the terminal resistor (150 ohms) should be connected when any connector is not connected.
Page 551 6F2T0200 (0.15) Locations of communication modules 5.5.3 The locations of the COM#1–3 are shown hatched when 1/3 size case is selected: [IO#1-2] [IO#1-1] Optional communication module LAN communication module (Port1) LAN communication module (Port2) Figure 5.5-5 Port locations (view from the rear) Lactations of C1 and C2 will be named ‘Port1’...
Page 552 6F2T0200 (0.15) Binary IO module (BIO) BIO structures 5.6.1 BIO modules are combined with an ordering number. The combined modules are mounted correspondently in IED case. If 1/3 size case is selected, the BIO modules are used for IO#1-1 and IO#1-2. When 1/2 size case is selected, the BIOs are used for IO#1-1, IO#1-2, IO#2, and IO#3.
Page 553 6F2T0200 (0.15) MV-BI1 MV-BI1 MV-BI1 consists of independent-negative terminal type and common-negative terminal type; the number of the independent ones is 2 and the number of the common ones is 13. The MV-BI1 has Fail output circuit. It is used for IO#1-1.
Page 554 6F2T0200 (0.15) MV-BIO1 (iii) MV-BIO1 MV-BIO1 has 8 binary output and 8 binary input circuits. The output circuits are made of normal type and the input circuits are made of common-negative terminal type. It will be used for IO#2 and IO#3. The user can select a pick- up threshold among three thresholds, which will be set for all binary input circuits.
Page 555 6F2T0200 (0.15) Locations of BIO modules 5.6.2 BIO modules are mounted at hatched area, as shown in Figure 5.6-4. [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] IO#1 IO#1-1 IO#1-2 IO#2 IO#3 Figure 5.6-4 BIO locations in 1/2 size case Figure 5.6-5 illustrates an example that some BIO modules are used for 1/2 size case. [IO#2] [IO#3] [IO#1]...
Page 556 6F2T0200 (0.15) Binary inputs 5.6.3 Types of binary input circuits There are two types of binary input circuits: Independent-negative terminal type Common-negative terminal type Table 5.6-2 describes the circuit features and symbols. Table 5.6-2 Input features and symbols Types Features Symbols -Isolated using photo coupler Independent-...
Page 557 6F2T0200 (0.15) Programmable binary input circuits (ii) Binary input circuits (BI) can have a pick-up threshold for the input signal. It can be set with setting [BITH*]. If chattering signals caused by bouncing contacts are coming, circuit filter can remove the chattering. The filter performance is set with setting [CMP_NUM]. Each binary BI is constructed with retard and invert logics, so the user can program the circuit with settings [On Delay Timer], [Off Delay Timer], [INVERSE-SW];...
Page 558 6F2T0200 (0.15) Threshold level To sense an input signal securely, a potential divider is provided at the front circuit. If input level is greater than a pick-up threshold, BI circuit will generate a detection signal. The sensitivity can be adjusted with settings [BITH1], [BITH2] and [BITH]. Note the settings are different and depending on BI circuits, as shown in Table 5.6-3.
Page 559 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.6-4 Setting items for binary input circuits of IO#1 Setting of BIO_SLOT_MV (Function ID: 200B41) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Common CMP_NUM 4 - 9 - Counting number to ignore input signals Level_11 / Common for both Level_12 / BITH1 - Threshold level at both BI1 and BI2 of MV-BI1...
Page 560 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.6-5 Setting items for binary input circuits of IO#2 and IO#3 Setting of BIO_SLOT_MV (Function ID: 200B42/200B43) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Common CMP_NUM 4 - 9 - Counting number to ignore input signals Level_1 / Level_2 / BITH - Threshold level at BI1–BI8 of MV-BIO1 Level_1...
Page 561 6F2T0200 (0.15) Binary outputs 5.6.4 Types of binary output circuits There are three types of binary output circuits: Normal type For fail alarm Table 5.6-6 describes the features and the symbols for the three. Table 5.6-6 Output features and symbols Type Features Symbols...
Page 562 6F2T0200 (0.15) From internal functions To external devices 8002001112 Contact [On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] [LOGIC-SW] & Arriving signals ≥ DRIVER [Input signal1] & & [Logic Timer] & ≥ [Input signal2] ≥ 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & [Input signal3] 8002001113 & Normal [INVERSE-SW] ≥...
Page 563 6F2T0200 (0.15) [Off Delay Timer], respectively. Logic level inversion When the inversion is required, set Inverse for the setting [INVERSE-SW]. Normal is for non- inversion. Logic timer switch In order that the BO can have a programmable reset characteristic, switch and setting are provided.
Page 564 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.6-7 Setting items for binary output circuits of IO#1 Setting of BIO_SLOT_MV (Function ID: 200B41) Default Setting items Range Contents GRE200-1 GRE200-2 Unit Note Note Switch for programming on binary BO 1 BO1_CPL Off / On output circuit1 Data ID of the arrival signal at circuit OC1-OPT- OC1-OPT-...
Page 565 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of BIO_SLOT_MV (Function ID: 200B41) Default Setting items Range Contents GRE200-1 GRE200-2 Unit Note Note INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse Switch to inverse a binary output Normal Normal Off / Delay / Dwell TIMER-SW Selection of Logic circuit / Latch Off delay timer value: "Delay"...
Page 566 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of BIO_SLOT_MV (Function ID: 200B41) Default Setting items Range Contents GRE200-1 GRE200-2 Unit Note Note Selection of gate for arrival signals#1– LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 Setting value for On-delay timer 0.000 0.000 Off Delay Timer...
Page 567 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.6-8 Setting items for binary output circuits of IO#2 and IO#3 Setting of BIO_SLOT_MV (Function ID: 200B42/200B43) Default Setting items Range Contents GRE200-1 GRE200-2 Unit Note Note Switch for programming on binary BO 1 BO1_CPL Off / On output circuit1 Data ID of the arrival signal at circuit CPL Input signal1...
Page 568 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of BIO_SLOT_MV (Function ID: 200B42/200B43) Default Setting items Range Contents GRE200-1 GRE200-2 Unit Note Note On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 Setting value for On-delay timer 0.000 0.000 Off Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 Setting value for Off-delay timer 0.000 0.000 INVERSE-SW...
Page 569 6F2T0200 (0.15) DC power and Fail terminals 5.6.5 MV-BO1 mounted at T2, has a DC/DC converter with a DC inlet, which is located at Terminal screw numbers 19 and 20 (see Figure 5.6-2). On the other hand, MV-BI1, which can be mounted at T1, provides Fail signal output, which is located at Terminal screw numbers: 19 and 20 (see Figure 5.6-1).
Page 570 6F2T0200 (0.15) CAUTION Note: DC/DC converter can run on AC power supply (100–240Vac), but use it for testing. Note: Fail circuit is constructed with N/C contact (“b” contact). When the IED turns on, the contact is closed. When the IED is powered off, the contact will be open. Note: The short-wire (between Terminal screws No.17 and No.
Page 571 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits 5.6.6 IO_SLOT1: Function ID: 200B41 (IO#1-1) Before the filer Signal monitoring points (before the filter) ◆ Element ID Name Description 8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter 8101011111 BI2-NC BI2 signal without filter 8201021111 BI3-NC BI3 signal without filter...
Page 572 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit) ◆ Element ID Name Description 8301031172 BI4-CPL BI4 signal with filter and programmable logic 8401041172 BI5-CPL BI5 signal with filter and programmable logic 8501051172 BI6-CPL BI6 signal with filter and programmable logic 8601061172 BI7-CPL BI7 signal with filter and programmable logic...
Page 573 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits 5.6.7 IO_SLOT1: Function ID: 200B41 (IO#1-2) Before the contact-driver Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver) ◆ Element ID Name Description 8002001112 BO1 signal 8102011112 BO2 signal 8202021112 BO3 signal 8302031112 BO4 signal 8402041112 BO5 signal 8502051112...
Page 574 6F2T0200 (0.15) Human Machine Interface (HMI) Outlook 5.7.1 Figure 5.7-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI) on the front panel. The HMI has a LCD screen, LEDs (#1–#14), operation keys, function keys (F1–F5), and a USB port. LCD screen can display information; e.g. IED operation menu, status, setting data, User monitoring, fault records and others.
Page 575 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.7-1 Settings of LCD screen contrast (LED: Function ID: 201B01)) Unit Default setting Setting items Range Contents value LCD Contrast 0 – 10 Degree of brightness of LCD screen LCD screen initialization (iii) If the text on the LCD screen is garbled, it may be recovered by initializing the LCD screen. In the reason, the IED has the function to initialize only LCD screen.
Page 576 6F2T0200 (0.15) Delayed light-up/delayed light-off (iii) The user can adjust the light-up time with settings. Set the timing to light up using settings [On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer] at LED #3 logic. Light-up inversion (iv) If the LED #3 should turn off when the light up signal is generated, set Inverse for the setting [INVERSE-SW].
Page 577 6F2T0200 (0.15) LED-03 3100031001 [On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3 & ≥ [Input signal 1] DRIVER & [Logic Timer] ≥1 & [Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & [Input signal 3] & ≥1 [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000 Inverse & Delay [Input signal 8] Dwell...
Page 578 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.7-2 Settings of LED indictors #3 to #14 (LED: Function ID: 201B01)) Unit Default setting Setting items Range Contents value LED#3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW LED#3 color selection Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned) Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID)
Page 579 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.7-3 Signal monitoring points on all the LED indicators (LED: Function ID: 201B01) Element ID Name Description 3100011001 IN SERV In service LED 3100021001 ERROR Error LED 3100031001 LED-03 Output signal of the LED indicator #3 3100041001 LED-04 Output signal of the LED indicator #4 3100051001...
Page 580 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function keys 5.7.4 Function keys (F1 to F5) are provided to jump to other menus during the operation on LCD screen; the jump destinations are already set as factory default (see Table 5.7-4). However, the user can program the F1 to F5 keys to jump to user-preferred menus using settings. Incidentally, the user can program the function key so that a binary signal is generated when the user presses the function key.
Page 581 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function key logic for F1 Terminal and BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 (Function ID: 200B01) (Function ID: 240001) wire “ ” Signal designated by Setting Data ID “F1 200B01_8002001112) ≥1 setting [Input signal 1] Signal to the SIGNAL” for the device “FUNC-KEY1”...
Page 582 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.7-6 Settings of Function keys (KEYINPUT: Function ID: 240001) Default setting Setting items Range Units Contents value Screen Jump / Assign Signal / Function Operation mode for the F1 key Screen Jump No Assign Signal (Preferred Data ID) Set a Data ID at the input on F1 key (No Assigned) Logic...
Page 583 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation keys 5.7.5 L/R key L/R key is provided with two LEDs. Either LEDs is turned on in response to one mode: Local or Remote. LED is lit up by the LOCRMT function. Table 5.7-8 shows the signal monitoring points on L/R LEDs.
Page 584 6F2T0200 (0.15) Clock function Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the UTC is selected;...
Page 585 6F2T0200 (0.15) Time Synchronization 5.8.3 The synchronization function can run when a synchronized signal is provided for respective IEDs; the user should select one of the following synchronization methods using the setting [Time_Sync_Src]: • SNTP method • IRIG-B method • Binary Input (BI) method •...
Page 586 6F2T0200 (0.15) Synchronization using SNTP Example of SNTP synchronization The SNTP method is possible when IEDs connect with time-servers. Figure 5.8-3 exemplifies two servers are connected with the IEDs using the LAN. Time server1 Time server2 …………. IED_1 IED_2 IED_n Figure 5.8-3 Two time servers connected on the LAN Setting procedure The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
Page 587 6F2T0200 (0.15) Synchronization using IRIG-B (ii) Example of IRIG-B synchronization The IRIG-B method is possible when a synchronization signal in the IRIG-B format is provided. The synchronization signal is transferred using the IRIG-B000 module†. IRIG-B000† Clock 10:00 [Time] 2012-11-21 10:00:05 IRIG-B signal [Format] generator Unit...
Page 588 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 5.8-2 Settings for the IRIG-B Time synchronization Setting Setting item Range Contents example SNTP / BI / MODBUS TimeSyncSrc Selection of sync method IRIG-B / IRIG-B / IEC103 IRIG-SYNC Off /On Operation of IRIG-B USE_BCDYEAR Off / On Selection of IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000 USE_LOCALTIME Off / On...
Page 589 6F2T0200 (0.15) Synchronization using BI signal (iii) When accurate1Hz square-wave can be supplied as a reference clock, the clock function can make the time synchronization. The 1Hz square-wave is transferred using a binary input circuit (BI). Example of time synchronization with a BI circuit Figure 5.8-7 exemplifies that the 1Hz square-wave is inputted at the BI1†.
Page 590 6F2T0200 (0.15) BI1(200B01 8001001111) for the setting [BI_ID]. Set a time adjuster for the setting [SYNC ADJ]. For example, set a value (e.g., −0.050s) for setting [SYNC ADJ]. The setting is used when the clock function should be synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square-wave due to the propagation or the operating time on the BI circuit.
Page 591 6F2T0200 (0.15) Synchronization using Modbus (iv) Time synchronization is possible when IEDs (Modbus slave) are connected with the substation computer (Modbus master) over the Modbus communication†. It is achieved by transferring time data over the Modbus commination. The time synchronization is carried out by the write multi registers function—Function code 0x10 (16).
Page 592 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting procedure The user should take the following steps for the Modbus time synchronization. • Set MODBUS for the [Time Sync Src]; and then, set On for the [MODBUS SYNC]. • Check that the MODBUS is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.8-11. Clock 10:00 [Time]...
Page 593 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting time zone 5.8.4 When the clock should run in the UTC, the user should set On for the setting [IS_UTC_base]. Additionally, the user should set the time zone† when the time should be displayed in the Local standard time.
Page 594 6F2T0200 (0.15) DST setting (Summer time setting) 5.8.5 When the summer time (DST) is applied, the user should set the beginning and the ending dates of the DST in the clock function. The user should set On for the setting [Summer time] for DST.
Page 595 6F2T0200 (0.15) March October Beginning of the DST E nding of the DST at 01:00 p.m. in Mar. 1 at 03:00 p.m. in Oct. 15 Setting 3 for the [ Setting 10 for the [ Start_Month End_Month Setting 1 for the [ Setting 3 for the [ Start_Week End_Week...
Page 596 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 5.8.6 Setting of CLOCK (Function ID: 200301) Default setting Setting item Range Contents Notes Units value Timezone -14.00 - 14.00 hour Time zone 0.00 --- / SNTP / BI / TimeSyncSrc MODBUS / IRIG-B / Time sync source SNTP IEC103 YYYYMMDD /...
Page 597 6F2T0200 (0.15) Group setting for protection functions As shown in Figure 5.9-1, protection settings (i.e., OC settings, EF settings, etc.) are segmented into eight groups, and different setting values of the relays can be set as per circumstances such as operation conditions and others. Note that changing the group cannot be not carried out instantly.
Page 598 6F2T0200 (0.15) consists of a binary input circuit (BI1), a number generation function (‘Binary selection’ provided in basic functions of the PLC editor), and the signal reception point. That is, when the B1 switch is closed, a signal enters the BI1 circuit and is carried to the Binary selection; accordingly the Binary selection, which is programmed to generate a group number ‘2’...
Page 599 6F2T0200 (0.15) Binary input circuits BI1 to BI3 A group number enters PLC basic-function PLC basic-function at IO#3 (IO_SLOT1) to “Setting function (Ondelay) (SEL) (Function ID: 201400)” BI3_1 DIN_BOOL UDINT#16#200B03 BOOL_TO_UNIT DTYPE UDINT#16#80 Delay time# UDINT#16#01001111 XX ms BI3_2 DIN_BOOL DOUT_UNIT_1 UDINT#16#200B03 BOOL_TO_UNIT...
Page 600 6F2T0200 (0.15) Engineering tool Contents Pages Pages Common tool Label creator Configuration tool Logging management tool Comparison tools for settings Modbus configuration tool Disturbance recorder tool Project management tool Double command blocking (DCB) PC connection Event recorder tool Relay and control settings tool Fault recorder tool Signal monitor IEC61850 configurator...
Page 601 Overview of GR-TIEMS When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). The GR-TIEMS should be installed into a PC prior to engineering.
Page 602 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection The user can connect the GR-TIEMS with the IED using either the LAN or the USB, as shown in Figure 6.2-1. Personal Computer USB Cable Figure 6.2-1 GR-TIEMS connected with IED Common tools Project management Project files are required to engage sub-engineering. The user can manage to read/write the project file of the IED using the project management function.
Page 603 6F2T0200 (0.15) possible when an error is detected during the IED operations. Double command block For controlling, there is a principle that a first receiving-command shall be carried out primarily. In other words, succeeding receiving-commands cannot have the right to run until the first receiving-command is not completed to operate (that is, the principle of double command blocking (DCB) is established).
Page 604 6F2T0200 (0.15) date and time is treated in the UTC. Notice that the time in the UTC is converted for the local time when the recording time is displayed on the PC. For the clock operation if the user selects neither the UTC, the time zone or the daylight saving time (the summer time), displaying incorrect time may result in between the IED Technical and the PC.
Page 605 6F2T0200 (0.15) feature (→p. 810). To confirm that, check the ordering code (→p.1004) IEC 60870-5-103 configuration tool The user can edit the data of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol used for the Slave. †Note: If the IED does not have the 103, this tool is not shown on the GR-TIEMS screen. GRE200 (1,2) - 586 -...
Page 606 6F2T0200 (0.15) PLC function Contents Pages About PLC function PLC driver Driver monitoring point Communication information for PLC BIT (Boolean) type IEC61850 GOOSE signals USINT (Unsigned short integer) type UNIT (Unsigned integer) type Error check UDINT (Unsigned double integer) type 592 IED screen information SINT (Short integer) type INT (Integer) type...
Page 607 Note: To handle the PLC editor on the PC, the user shall purchase a software license Appendix: Ordering (EP-261; see ) from Toshiba sales representative. For more Basic manual: information of PLC and MULTIPROG®, see separate manual Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor (6F2S1904)) PLC data error The Automatic supervision reports the error information when an error occurs in PLC logic.
Page 608 6F2T0200 (0.15) PLC driver The PLC driver is provided for the user-programmed logic. Monitoring point of PLC driver 7.3.1 The user can assign several values for the operation. Three-hundred-and-twenty PLC drivers are grouped for 128 BITs, 32 USINTs, 32 UINTs, 32 UDINTs, 32 SINTs, 32 INTs, and 32 DINTs in the function “PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230302)”.
Page 609 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point at PLC Driver ◆ PLC_DRV in BIT type (Function ID: 230302) Description Element ID Name 8F10121BBF BIT_05_7 General PLC monitoring point for users 8010131BB0 BIT_06_0 General PLC monitoring point for users 8110131BB1 BIT_06_1 General PLC monitoring point for users 8210131BB2 BIT_06_2 General PLC monitoring point for users...
Page 610 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point at PLC Driver ◆ PLC_DRV in BIT type (Function ID: 230302) Description Element ID Name 8710161BB7 BIT_12_7 General PLC monitoring point for users 8810161BB8 BIT_13_0 General PLC monitoring point for users 8910161BB9 BIT_13_1 General PLC monitoring point for users 8A10161BBA BIT_13_2 General PLC monitoring point for users...
Page 611 6F2T0200 (0.15) UDINT type (iv) Monitoring point at PLC Driver ◆ PLC_DRV in UDINT type (Function ID: 230302) Description Element ID Name 3213001BB0 U32_00 General PLC monitoring point for users 3213011BB0 U32_01 General PLC monitoring point for users 3213021BB0 U32_02 General PLC monitoring point for users 3213031BB0 U32_03...
Page 612 6F2T0200 (0.15) Timer variable settings using PLC drivers The user can set variable timers of user’s PLC logics using settings of PLC drivers (FB: PLC_DRV 230302). The LCD screen menu provides settings [UTM1] ~ [UTM24], and the user can set those timer values through the LCD screen. Figure 7.4-1 shows that a delay timer “TON1”...
Page 613 6F2T0200 (0.15) Example of timer action1 Supposed that the timer was set the [UTM1]=30 and the TON1 timer counter has started. When the counter counts 15 ms, and if the user sets 10 for the [UTM1], the FB output is yielded instantly. FB output FB input Counter...
Page 614 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting value The [UTMxx] value is selected among 0 to 10,000,000 [ms] (see Table 7.4-1). Figure 7.4-4 and Figure 7.4-5 illustrates how to see a value for the [UTMxx]. PLC timer settings: [UTM1]~ [UTM24] Figure 7.4-4 [UTMxx] timer setting menu (GR-TIMES operation) Setting Setting Common...
Page 615 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 7.4-1 UTM setting table PLC timer (Function ID: 230302) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note UTM1 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer ##1 UTM2 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer #2 UTM3 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer #3 UTM4...
Page 616 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 7.4-2 Inputs for driving the timers PLC timer (Function ID: 230302) Function ID + Element ID Setting name Description 230302 3200013001 UTM1 Input point for the delay timer(UTM1) 230302 3200023001 UTM2 Input point for the delay timer(UTM2) 230302 3200033001 UTM3 Input point for the delay timer(UTM3)
Page 617 6F2T0200 (0.15) Communication information IEC61850 GOOSE signals The IED can generates communication quality information when the IED communication is carried out in the 61850 protocol. For example, signal “SUB_QUAL#0” can be generated when the IED receives a GOOSE packet from the remote IED. The user can manage those GOOSE Chapter packets by the PLC function.
Page 618 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Editio1 and Editon2) ◆ GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Description Element ID Name 3100201001 SUB_QUAL#32 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100211001 SUB_QUAL#33 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100221001 SUB_QUAL#34 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100231001 SUB_QUAL#35 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100241001 SUB_QUAL#36 GOOSE subscription quality status...
Page 619 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Editio1 and Editon2) ◆ GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Description Element ID Name 31004A1001 SUB_QUAL#74 GOOSE subscription quality status 31004B1001 SUB_QUAL#75 GOOSE subscription quality status 31004C1001 SUB_QUAL#76 GOOSE subscription quality status 31004D1001 SUB_QUAL#77 GOOSE subscription quality status 31004E1001 SUB_QUAL#78 GOOSE subscription quality status...
Page 620 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Editio1 and Editon2) ◆ GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Description Element ID Name 3100741001 SUB_QUAL#116 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100751001 SUB_QUAL#117 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100761001 SUB_QUAL#118 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100771001 SUB_QUAL#119 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100781001 SUB_QUAL#120 GOOSE subscription quality status...
Page 621 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Editio1 and Editon2) ◆ GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Description Element ID Name 31009E1001 SUB_QUAL#158 GOOSE subscription quality status 31009F1001 SUB_QUAL#159 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A01001 SUB_QUAL#160 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A11001 SUB_QUAL#161 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A21001 SUB_QUAL#162 GOOSE subscription quality status...
Page 622 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Editio1 and Editon2) ◆ GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Description Element ID Name 3100C81001 SUB_QUAL#200 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100C91001 SUB_QUAL#201 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100CA1001 SUB_QUAL#202 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100CB1001 SUB_QUAL#203 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100CC1001 SUB_QUAL#204 GOOSE subscription quality status...
Page 623 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Editio1 and Editon2) ◆ GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Description Element ID Name 3100F21001 SUB_QUAL#242 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F31001 SUB_QUAL#243 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F41001 SUB_QUAL#244 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F51001 SUB_QUAL#245 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F61001 SUB_QUAL#246 GOOSE subscription quality status...
Page 624 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Editio1 and Editon2) ◆ GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Description Element ID Name 31011C1001 SUB_QUAL#284 GOOSE subscription quality status 31011D1001 SUB_QUAL#285 GOOSE subscription quality status 31011E1001 SUB_QUAL#286 GOOSE subscription quality status 31011F1001 SUB_QUAL#287 GOOSE subscription quality status 3101201001 SUB_QUAL#288 GOOSE subscription quality status...
Page 625 6F2T0200 (0.15) Recording function Contents Pages Pages Disturbance recorder Fault recorder Time setting Recording information Trigger setting Date and time Trigger relays for recording Fault phase Overcurrent relay (OC-DRT) Trip mode Earth fault relay (EF-DRT) Result of Fault locator (FL) Under voltage for phase relay (UV-DRT) Evolving faults Under voltage for line (UVS-DRT)
Page 626 6F2T0200 (0.15) The recording function consists of three recording features: (1) Fault recorder, (2) Event recorder, and (3) Disturbance recorder. The fault recorder collects the information about the power system quantities when a fault occurs. The event recorder groups state information when the changes are detected.
Page 627 6F2T0200 (0.15) ID201] to [OP Mode ID264] are used for general purposes to record the logical signals. †Note: A number of the operation identifiers are provided by the protection functions. For example, the ‘OC1-OPT-A’ operation identifier is used to identify the pickup in the first element of the overcurrent function (OC1) in phase-A.
Page 628 6F2T0200 (0.15) Frequency ✓ ✓ Rate of frequency changing df/dt ✓ ✓ 3 phase total Power factor ✓ ✓ Per phases PFa, PFb, PFc 3 phase total Active power factor ✓ ✓ Per phases Pa, Pb, Pc 3 phase total Reactive power factor ✓...
Page 629 6F2T0200 (0.15) Fault duration time IED automatically measures and records the duration of fault occurrence (fault duration time). Figure 8.1-1 shows the “Fault duration time” that IED can automatically measure and “Actual fault duration time”. Though the period of actual fault duration time is from fault occurrence until fault clearance by CB opened, the period that IED can measure is only from any relay operation by fault occurrence until the CB trip signal generation.
Page 630 6F2T0200 (0.15) Start and stop of measuring the fault duration time is processed by the logic illustrated in Figure 8.1-1. Measuring is started and stopped by the generation of PLC connecting points [FDT_PU_Trig] and [FDT_DO_Trig]. The “GEN TRIP” signal is assigned to [FDT_DO_Trig] as default, and no default signal is assigned to [FDT_PU_Trig].
Page 631 6F2T0200 (0.15) As mentioned above, the fault duration time measured by IED is shorter than the actual fault duration time, because it does not include relay operating time, BO contact closing time and CB opening time. For this reason, LCD screen shall display a fault duration time, which is complemented with relay operating time, BO contact closing time and CB opening time.
Page 632 6F2T0200 (0.15) Fault recording information on LCD 8.1.2 Figure 8.1-2 illustrates the information displayed on the LCD screen, which can display up to eight fault records (#1 to #8). Figure 8.1-3 illustrates the structure of the first fault record#1. The line○ indicates fault phases.
Page 633 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setup for the fault recorder 8.1.3 Operation identifiers (ID1–ID128) The user can select the operation identifies arbitrarily using the settings [OP Mode ID1] etc. For example, when the operation result with regard to the overcurrent relay element (i.e., OC1 in phase-A) shall be recorded, choose the operated signal ‘OC1-OPT-A (440081 800011B68)”...
Page 634 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.1-4 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in model GRE200-1 Settings in Fault recorder Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection Actual PLC connection Data IDs Screen names points Data IDs Screen names points [OP Mode ID1] 4400818000011B68 OC1-OPT 4751818500161B60 DFRQ6...
Page 635 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.1-5 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in model GRE200-2 Settings in Fault recorder Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection Actual PLC connection Data IDs Screen names points Data IDs Screen names points [OP Mode ID1] 4400818000011B68 OC1-OPT 4751818500161B60 DFRQ6...
Page 636 6F2T0200 (0.15) Recording logic 8.1.4 The operation of the fault recorder can be directed by the TRC function, protection functions (FC1 to FC40†), and the PLC function, as shown in Figure 8.1-4. Fault recorder Clock function Date & Time & Date and time at fault Metering function Quantities in the power system...
Page 637 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 8.1.5 FAULT_RECORD(Function ID: 204201) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Pre-Fault Time 10s/ 50 / 100 / 200 / Recording time before the fault Sec. Time to reset measuring for the fault duration F.Durat_Time 0.01 - 300.00 100.00 time Adjustment time to approximate the actual...
Page 638 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 8.1.6 Signal monitoring point ◆ FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Description Name Element ID ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001 Receiving Trigger1 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG2 8120011001 Receiving Trigger2 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG3 8220021001 Receiving Trigger3 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG4 8320031001 Receiving Trigger4 FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001 TRIG1 signal generated FAULT RECORD TRIG3 8200031001 TRIG3 signal generated FLTRCDING...
Page 639 6F2T0200 (0.15) Event recorder Signals will be generated when something are happening in the IED; they are called event information. If wishing to record them, the user should select signals for the event recorder function. There are 768 triggers, some of which have been set as a default, in the function. Three categories are provided for the triggers;...
Page 640 6F2T0200 (0.15) trigger#14 using the [Trigger ID14]. Note that the both triggers (#7 and #14) are smaller than the setting [End of E.Record-1]=256; hence, the both are listed in the ‘Event recored1’ list. Keep in mind that the event names are set by the [Event Name7] and [Event Name14].Table 8.2-1 and the others tabulate the ones.
Page 641 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.2-1 [End of E.Record-1] in model GRE200-1 (1/3) Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names [Trigger ID1] 2200013110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] 4A70818000001B63 On-Off ARC READY [Trigger ID181] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID2] 2200013110211001...
Page 642 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.2-2 [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of E.Record- 2 ]=5 12 in model GRE200-1 (2/3) Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names [Trigger ID257] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID347] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID437] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID258]...
Page 643 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.2-3 [End of E.Record- 2 ]=5 12 in model GRE200-1 (3/3) Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names [Trigger ID513] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID603] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID693] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID514] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID604]...
Page 644 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.2-4 [End of E.Record-1]=256 in model GRE200-2 (1/3) Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names [Trigger ID1] 2200013110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] 4A70818000001B63 On-Off ARC READY [Trigger ID181] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID2] 2200013110211001...
Page 645 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.2-5 [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of E.Record- 2 ]=5 12 in model GRE200-2 (2/3) Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Names Triggers Data IDs Names [Trigger ID257] (Not assigned) [Trigger ID347] (Not assigned) [Trigger ID437] (Not assigned) [Trigger ID258] (Not assigned)
Page 646 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.2-6 [End of E.Record- 2 ]=5 12 in model GRE200-2 (3/3) Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names [Trigger ID513] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID603] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID693] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID514] (Not Assigned) [Trigger ID604]...
Page 647 6F2T0200 (0.15) Trigger modes 8.2.2 We can simplify the trigger signals into four: ‘On’, ‘Off ’, ‘On and Off ’, and ‘Change’ modes. Thus, the user can should set a mode for respective triggers using [Trigger Mode1] and others. ‘On’ mode In the ‘On’...
Page 648 6F2T0200 (0.15) of group settings (e.g., the ‘SYS_CHG’ signal; which has been connected with the trigger#9 Technical using the setting [Trigger ID9], as default; we have been discussed in Chapter description: Group setting for protection functions →p. 578.) Screen information 8.2.3 Figure 8.2-5 illustrates the structure about the ‘Event Recored1’...
Page 649 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 8.2.5 EVENTRECORD(Function ID: 200710) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note End of E.Record-1 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group1 (Level1) End of E.Record-2 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group2 (Level2) Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) –...
Page 650 6F2T0200 (0.15) Disturbance recorder Disturbance recorder function is to record the phenomenon about the occurrences of the fault with 1ms accuracy; the function starts to operate when TRC trip command is issued. The function has unique overcurrent relays, so the relays can instruct to start the disturbance recorder function.
Page 651 6F2T0200 (0.15) EF-DRT relay setting (ii) An earth fault relay (EF-DRT) is provided; set the pick-up value for the [EF-DRT]; then set On for the [EF-DRT-EN]. UV-DRT relay setting (iii) An under-voltage relay (Line-ground) (UV-DRT) is provided. Set the value for the [UV-DRT]; then set On for the [UV-DRT-EN].
Page 652 6F2T0200 (0.15) Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena 8.3.3 Note that the maximum number for recording the disturbance phenomena depends on the recording time and the sampling rate. Table 8.3-1 illustrates the maximum number. For example, 128 phenomena can be memorized in the disturbance recorder, if the function operates in 50Hz system.
Page 653 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.3-3 Logic signals in model GRE200-1 [Binary [Binary Settings Data IDs [Binary Sig. Name*] Origins Settings Data IDs Sig. Origins Settings Data IDs Sig. Origins Name*] Name*] [Binary Signal1] 48A0818000001B73 CB-A_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal91] (Not Assigned) …. [Binary Signal191] (Not Assigned) ….
Page 654 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 8.3-4 Logic signals in model GRE200-2 [Binary [Binary Settings Data IDs [Binary Sig. Name*] Origins Settings Data IDs Sig. Origins Settings Data IDs Sig. Origins Name*] Name*] [Binary Signal1] 48A0818000001B73 CB-A_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal91] (Not Assigned) …. [Binary Signal191] (Not Assigned) ….
Page 655 6F2T0200 (0.15) Trigger settings for PLC programming 8.3.5 In order that the user PLC program is able to command the operation of the disturbance recorder, the user should set the [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]. That is, the PLC output points should be connected with the disturbance recorder using the settings [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4];...
Page 656 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 8.3-4 Screen shot from GR-TIEMS GRE200 (1,2) - 637 -...
Page 657 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 8.3.7 DISTURB_REC(Function ID: 200401) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Record Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Time for disturbance recording Pre-fault Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Pre-fault time Trip Trig.SW Off / On – Operation with the TRC trip command DISTURB_REC(Function ID: 200401) Setting items Range...
Page 658 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal 8.3.8 Signal monitoring point ◆ DRT_MV (Function ID: 4B0081) Element ID Name Description 8000001C20 DRT-LP DRT-LP protection operated 8400021C23 EF-DRT EF-DRT relay element operated 8000011C20 OC-DRT-A OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-A) 8100011C21 OC-DRT-B OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-B) 8200011C22 OC-DRT-C OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)
Page 659 6F2T0200 (0.15) Transferred information during fault The IED can transfer the information for the fault duration in the IEC61850 communication†. †Note: The transferring is only available in “Edition1 with option” or “Editon2” of the Communication IEC61850. For the information about the option, see Chapter protocol: IEC 61850 communication: About protocol , separately (→p.
Page 660 6F2T0200 (0.15) Transferred information about tripped phase and mode 8.4.2 Information about the tripped phases and mode can be transferred with the signals in Table 8.4-2. For more information about tripped phases and modes, see Chapters 8.1.1(ii) and (iii). Table 8.4-2 Transferred information Items Signal names Number of faults recorded...
Page 661 6F2T0200 (0.15) Transferring record value and information 8.4.4 ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 3130001180 FLT_CNT Count of Fault Record 9030001006 FLT_TM Fault Time 8030001B60 FLT_PH_A Fault Phase A 8130001B61 FLT_PH_B Fault Phase B 8230001B62 FLT_PH_C Fault Phase C...
Page 662 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 4330191001 FLTMS0026 Value taken during the fault (0026) 43301A1001 FLTMS0027 Value taken during the fault (0027) 43301B1001 FLTMS0028 Value taken during the fault (0028) 43301C1001 FLTMS0029 Value taken during the fault (0029)
Page 663 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 4330451001 FLTMS0070 Value taken during the fault (0070) 4330461001 FLTMS0071 Value taken during the fault (0071) 4330471001 FLTMS0072 Value taken during the fault (0072) 4330481001 FLTMS0073 Value taken during the fault (0073)
Page 664 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 4330711001 FLTMS0114 Value taken during the fault (0114) 4330721001 FLTMS0115 Value taken during the fault (0115) 4330731001 FLTMS0116 Value taken during the fault (0116) 4330741001 FLTMS0117 Value taken during the fault (0117)
Page 665 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 43309D1001 FLTMS0158 Value taken during the fault (0158) 43309E1001 FLTMS0159 Value taken during the fault (0159) 43309F1001 FLTMS0160 Value taken during the fault (0160) 4330A01001 FLTMS0161 Value taken during the fault (0161)
Page 666 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 4330C91001 FLTMS0202 Value taken during the fault (0202) 4330CA1001 FLTMS0203 Value taken during the fault (0203) 4330CB1001 FLTMS0204 Value taken during the fault (0204) 4330CC1001 FLTMS0205 Value taken during the fault (0205)
Page 667 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 4330F51001 FLTMS0246 Value taken during the fault (0246) 4330F61001 FLTMS0247 Value taken during the fault (0247) 4330F71001 FLTMS0248 Value taken during the fault (0248) 4330F81001 FLTMS0249 Value taken during the fault (0249)
Page 668 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 8150211135 FLTOPM034 Status at Operation identifier ID34 8250221135 FLTOPM035 Status at Operation identifier ID35 8350231135 FLTOPM036 Status at Operation identifier ID36 8450241135 FLTOPM037 Status at Operation identifier ID37 8550251135 FLTOPM038 Status at Operation identifier ID38...
Page 669 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 8D504D1135 FLTOPM078 Status at Operation identifier ID78 8E504E1135 FLTOPM079 Status at Operation identifier ID79 8F504F1135 FLTOPM080 Status at Operation identifier ID80 8050501135 FLTOPM081 Status at Operation identifier ID81 8150511135 FLTOPM082 Status at Operation identifier ID82...
Page 670 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 8950791135 FLTOPM122 Status at Operation identifier ID122 8A507A1135 FLTOPM123 Status at Operation identifier ID123 8B507B1135 FLTOPM124 Status at Operation identifier ID124 8C507C1135 FLTOPM125 Status at Operation identifier ID125 8D507D1135 FLTOPM126 Status at Operation identifier ID126...
Page 671 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal generated for transferring FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201) Element ID Signal name Description 8550A51135 FLTOPM238 Status at Logical operation identifier ID238 8650A61135 FLTOPM239 Status at Logical operation identifier ID239 8750A71135 FLTOPM240 Status at Logical operation identifier ID240 8850A81135 FLTOPM241 Status at Logical operation identifier ID241...
Page 672 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring function Contents Pages Pages Accumulated time statistic data Power statistic data Information Counter statistic data (GCNT) Settings Information Regulator Dead band feature (SD) Peak-demand statistic data Demand statistic data Information Information Max values Max values Minimum values Minimum values Average values Average values...
Page 673 6F2T0200 (0.15) Outline The IED has the monitoring function to measure the number of power quantities and statistics data obtained at the VCT and BI circuits†. When the monitoring function begins to measure the power quantities, the IED will have mathematical data so that data, such as primary, secondary voltages etc.
Page 674 6F2T0200 (0.15) metering function has minimum sensing threshold; thus, the user shall notice that zero (0) is displayed, if the provided data is lesser than the threshold. Metering 10:48 1/59 12.345kA 123.45deg 12.345kA 123.45deg 12.345kA 123.45deg Figure 9.2-1 Current meter on the IED screen Note: If VCT does not have any quantity, the value is displayed in “***.**”...
Page 675 6F2T0200 (0.15) shows the unit lists in the metering funciton. Table 9.2-3 Selection of units to display Metering items Settings Selection of a unit to display Voltage (V) [V-Display Unit] Volt (V) or kilo-volt (kV) Current (I) [I-Display Unit] Ampare (A) or kilo-ampare (kA) Active power (P) [P-Display Unit] Kilo-watt (kW) or Mega-watt (MW)
Page 676 6F2T0200 (0.15) Metering in reactive power (Q) (ii) Similar to the active power (P), the user should set the metering sign for the reactive power (Q). The Q value will have the minus sign (–) based on the P value, when Lag is set for setting [Current] (Figure 9.2-4.a).
Page 677 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PF>0) (PF <0) (PF <0) (PF <0) [Power]= [Current (PF <0) (PF >0) (PF>0) (PF >0) a. Q has a minus sign be the outside. The dec sending P having “a [Power]=Send [Power]=Send lags the voltage. [Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead [Current]=Lag (PF >0) (PF<0)
Page 678 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting for the report (Dead band feature) 9.2.6 The data collected in the metering function will be sent to the network upward, but the data sent may give the network a heavy burden because the amount of the data sent could be larger. Thus, the dead band (SD) feature is designed not to send unnecessary data will not be sent (say, the dead band feature regulates not to send the same data repeatedly).
Page 679 6F2T0200 (0.15) limit and lower limit using the setting [ISD] in %. The limit-size of the SD feature is calculated based on the amount of the entering current. Table 9.2-4 shows respective settings for the power quantities. Table 9.2-4 SD settings for respective quantities Units for Quantities SD settings...
Page 680 6F2T0200 (0.15) Statistics data (Power value group) Table 9.3-1 shows the statistics information and its abbreviation in power value data. Table 9.3-1 Power value data Groups Displayed quantities Abbreviations Power values Watt-hour (plus/minus), var-hour (plus/minus) Wh, varh Power information on the screen 9.3.1 Figure 9.3-1 shows the information about the watt-hour and var-hour (Wh and varh).
Page 681 6F2T0200 (0.15) Statistics data (Demand value group) The user can keep track of the variable power quantities using the demand feature; the statistical information (such as maximum load, minimum load, and averaged load) are collected in every defined period. Table 9.4-1 Demand data Model GRE200-§...
Page 682 6F2T0200 (0.15) Demand Value 10:48 1/60 Ia Max 0.00kA Ia Min 0.00kA Ia Ave 0.00kA Figure 9.4-1 Example of Demand Value screen Max/Min/Averaged information about the demand feature 9.4.2 The demand feature is used to calculate the active power (P), the reactive power (P), and the complex power (S) that are weighted with the plus (+) or minus (–) sign;...
Page 683 6F2T0200 (0.15) Resetting data in demand features 9.4.4 The data will be cleared by the following cases: To energize the IED or to make the initialization about the IED functions To set a value for the setting [Demand_period] To operate “Reset All Values” on the IED menu Demand Value 10:48 Demand Value...
Page 684 6F2T0200 (0.15) Statistics data (Peak-demand value group) Similar to the demand feature (Demand value group), the user can have another peak-demand feature that provides the Max/Min/Ave data that can be obtained from the initialized time to the current time; note these data have been calculated from the first energizing moment of the IED.
Page 685 6F2T0200 (0.15) Statistics data (Counter group) The user can check the counting numbers provided by the general counter function†. Table 9.6-1 and others show the user to find the count numbers in the counter group. Table 9.6-1 Counter data Counter number Correspondences Group Origin of info (default)
Page 686 6F2T0200 (0.15) Statistics data (Accumulated time) Over all running time for which the IED has operated is provided in “Accumulated Time”. The user can see the overall time on the Accumulated Time screen. The time will be cleared when the IED is switched off. Accumulated Time 10:48 ACT_TIME...
Page 687 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring for miscellaneous functions Operating status of relay elements, binary IO modules, communication modules, GOOSE, and diagnostics are displayed in the monitoring function. Relay element User interface: Monitoring sub- (For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter menu: Relay Elements (→p.
Page 688 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting Metering settings in MES_MV (Function ID: 710081) Default Unit Setting item Range Contents Notes setting value Display Value Primary/Secondary – Display selection of primary or secondary Primary I-Display Unit A/kA – Current shown in Ampere or Kilo-Ampere V-Display Unit V/kV –...
Page 689 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal Common signal Signal monitoring point ◆ MES_ MANAGEMENT_MV (Function ID: 711081) Element ID Name Description 31A0001060 CT-ERR CT Monitoring Result 3260001A60 FAULT DURATION TIME Fault duration time 31A0001063 IZ-ERR IZ Monitoring Result 31A0051060 V0-ERR V0 Monitoring Result 31A0061060 V2-ERR V2 Monitoring Result...
Page 690 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal of metering item (ii) MES_MANAGEMENT_MV (Function ID: 711081) Element ID of the signal used for each function Metering item Description Unit IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 Modbus Note Metering on the screen Ia measurement primary 4301001076 4231001076 2271001076 Modbus conversion factor: 100 Ia-Angle Ia measurement angle...
Page 691 6F2T0200 (0.15) MES_MANAGEMENT_MV (Function ID: 711081) Element ID of the signal used for each function Metering item Description Unit IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 Modbus Note Metering on the screen Qb measurement primary 4304011096 4234011096 2274011096 Modbus conversion factor: 1 Qc measurement primary 4304021097 4234021097 2274021097...
Page 692 6F2T0200 (0.15) DEMAND_MANAGEMENT_MV (Function ID: 714081) Element ID of the signal used for each function Metering item Description Unit IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 Modbus Note Metering on the screen P Min Minimum of primary P 4313291098 2233291098 Modbus conversion factor: 1 P Ave Average of primary P 4313391098...
Page 693 6F2T0200 (0.15) DEMAND_MANAGEMENT_MV (Function ID: 714081) Element ID of the signal used for each function Metering item Description Unit IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 Modbus Note Metering on the screen Ise Min Peak minimum of primary Ise 432924107C 223924107C Modbus conversion factor: 100 Ise Ave Peak average of primary Ise 432934107C...
Page 694 6F2T0200 (0.15) DEMAND_MANAGEMENT_MV (Function ID: 714081) Element ID of the signal used for each function Metering item Description Unit IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 Modbus Note Metering on the screen Vab Min Peak minimum of secondary Vab 4322251050 2232251050 Modbus conversion factor: 10 Vab Ave Peak average of secondary Vab 4322351050...
Page 695 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10 Automatic supervision Contents Pages Supervision of analog input data on VCT (ACC error) Blocking the automatic supervision alarms A.M.F Supervision of binary IO module at IO#1 (BIO#1 error) Supervision of binary IO module at IO#2 (BIO#2 error) Supervision of binary IO module at IO#3 (BIO#3 error) Supervision of board connection (Board error) Board...
Page 696 6F2T0200 (0.15) Outline of automatic supervision In power system, the protection function is not required to operate during normal conditions. That is, the protection function should stay silent for the unfaulty conditions, but it has to start respond immediately upon the occurrence of the fault. Therefore, as for the operation of the protection system, the detection of an unhealthy condition, such as malfunction or errors in the hardware or in the software, is requisite within the IED.
Page 697 6F2T0200 (0.15) Error LED and LCD error message (ii) Automatic supervision function can issues supervisor results on LEDs and LCD screen†. If the network is connected with IEDs, they can be transferred for the remote terminals. Table 10.1-2 shows that some LEDs are used for the automatic supervision function. Table 10.1-2 Displays on LEDs, LCD, and SAS Levels “In service”...
Page 698 6F2T0200 (0.15) Fail output and BO circuit drive (iii) Automatic supervision function can drive Fail contact (N/C or “b” contact) on BIO module at T1† when an error occurs without warning. Note that, the drives for respective BO circuits‡ on BIO will be locked out when serious error (Level 1=Critical error) is detected. Table 10.1-4 FAIL contact, BO, LED outputs depending on levels Error FAIL†...
Page 699 6F2T0200 (0.15) Generic supervision tasks Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error) 10.2.1 CPU verifies ROM and RAM every two minutes. When an error is found, the message is displayed by the supervision function. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. Checking error on RAM and ROM will be carried out periodically.
Page 700 6F2T0200 (0.15) Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error) 10.2.2 Memory check sum is verified every four minutes in the CPU. When an error is found the error message is displayed by the supervision function. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. The check- sum is monitored periodically.
Page 701 6F2T0200 (0.15) Supervision of RAM (RAM error) 10.2.3 For the RAM circuit, reading and writing operation are verified at any time. When an error is found, the error message will be displayed by the automatic supervision function. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. Checking is carried out at any time.
Page 702 6F2T0200 (0.15) Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) 10.2.4 Error-correcting code memory (ECC memory) is verified at any time. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. Checking is carried out at any time. If an error is detected, the IED automatically restarts the operation. The supervision function runs at the CPU module .
Page 703 6F2T0200 (0.15) Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) 10.2.5 Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory (MRAM memory) is verified every one second. When an error is found, the error message is displayed by the automatic supervision function. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. Checking is carried out at any time.
Page 704 6F2T0200 (0.15) Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error) 10.2.6 Detecting errors on FPGA will be provided when CPU detects fatal failures. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. Checking errors is carried out at any time. If an error is detected, the IED automatically restarts the operation.
Page 705 6F2T0200 (0.15) Supervision of program codes (CPU error) 10.2.7 Verifying program codes in ROM and RAM is carried out every time. When an error is found the error message will be displayed by the supervision function. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. Detecting code errors is carried out every second in RAM and ROM.
Page 706 6F2T0200 (0.15) Supervision of task operation (RUN error) 10.2.8 Tasks are monitored every two minutes in IED. The message will be screened when a task stops. If the task is idling, the supervisor monitors the task every 15 minutes. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) unconditionally.
Page 707 6F2T0200 (0.15) Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) 10.2.9 The occurrences of non-maskable-interruptions (NMIs) are examined every time on CPU module. When the interruption is triggered, the interruption message will be displayed. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. Detecting interruptions is carried out at any time.
Page 708 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) Sampling data is verified at any time. If an error is found, the error message will be displayed by the automatic supervision function. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. Sampling data is checked every second.
Page 709 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) Setting values are checked every second. An error message is displayed when the incorrect value is found. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) in the automatic supervision. The detection is carried out periodically.
Page 710 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) The operation of real time clock (RTC) is checked every five minutes. An error message will be displayed when the RTC is stopping. Error level Default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error) generally, but the user can change it using setting [CHK_RTC:LVl], but remember that On should be set for setting [CHK_RTC:Sw].
Page 711 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.13 Supervision of analog input data on VCT (ACC error) failures can be detected by the supervision function. Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input Note: see Chapter (→p. 510). Error level Error has been set at level 1 (Serious error ;...
Page 712 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.14 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) CT supervision is to examine in order that three-phase currents are balanced and the current in zero-sequence is minimum. The CT supervision can secure the operation of the CT circuits†. By monitoring the currents flowing on analog input circuits, it is also applicable to detect a failure on CT circuit.
Page 713 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.15 Current transformer failure (CT fail) CT failure can be detected by CT failure detection function (CTF†). Relay application: CT failure detection †Note: See Chapter (→p. 228). Error level Error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error; default), but the user can change it with setting [CHK_CTF:LVl].
Page 714 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.16 Supervision of current in zero-sequence (IZ error) The zero-phase-sequence current entering to the input circuit is monitored; it is possible to provide a high sensitivity to detect the failure using the residual circuit current. Equation (10.2-2) is represented for the supervision: −...
Page 715 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.17 Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (V2 error) Negative-sequence voltage is calculated regularly using three-phase voltages. If Equation (10.2-3) is satisfied over 10 seconds, the supervision function determines that a failure occurs on input circuits. The voltage in negative sequence can be used to detect a failure on the voltage input circuit with high sensitivity.
Page 716 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.18 Supervision of voltage in zero-sequence (VZ error) Zero-sequence-phase voltage is automatically calculated with three-phase voltages. If Equation (10.2-4) is satisfied, the supervision function determines that zero-sequence-phase voltage is applied erroneously. (10.2-4) ≥ 6.35⁡(V) Error level Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can program the level using setting [CHK_VZ:LVl];...
Page 717 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.19 Supervision of binary IO module at IO#1 (BIO#1 error) Supervision function can detect the operation failure of BIO module at #IO1. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error ; default). The user can change it the level with setting [CHK_BIO1:LVl] when BIO module is mounted at IO#1-1 and IO#1-2 .
Page 718 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.20 Supervision of binary IO module at IO#2 (BIO#2 error) Supervision function can detect the operation failure of BIO module at #IO2. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error ; default). The user can change it the level with setting [CHK_BIO2:LVl] when BIO module is mounted at IO#2 slot.
Page 719 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.21 Supervision of binary IO module at IO#3 (BIO#3 error) Supervision function can detect the operation failure of BIO module at #IO3. Error level The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error ; default). The user can change it the level with setting [CHK_BIO3:LVl] when BIO module is mounted at IO#3 slot.
Page 720 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.22 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) HMI supervising is provided. Error level The error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error; default). The user can change it with setting [CHK_HMI:LVl]. Remember that the user needs to set On for setting [CHK_HMI:Sw]. The manufacturer has set ten (10) seconds to detect a failure.
Page 721 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.23 Supervision of power supply module (Power error) A power error is issued when voltage generated in DC/DC converter† is less than a threshold. Technical description; DC power and Fail terminals †Note: See Chapter (→p. 551). If AC supply—however, the manufacture does not guarantee the AC operation—is connected with DC/DC, the user shall set Off for the setting [CHK_POWER:Sw] (that is, the supervision function shall be stopped).
Page 722 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.24 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error) Error in the PLC function is detected because the data coded by PLC editor has an error. Error level The error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error; default), but the user can change it with setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:LVl].
Page 723 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 10.2-48 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ PLC_DAT Display Meaning of the detailed information area Left column Right column 00000001 No PLC data exists in the 00000001 Watch dog error IED. 00000002 CPU load exceeded 00000002 Error in input Data 00000003 File error 00000004 Error in output Data 00000004 Test info string error...
Page 724 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.25 Voltage transformer failure (VT fail) Relay application: VT failure VT failure can be detected in VT failure function (see Chapter detection →p. 222). Error level Error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error; default), but the user can change it with setting [CHK_VTF:LVl].
Page 725 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.26 Supervision of circuit breaker contacts (CB fail) Detecting the CB operation failure is achieved with the service of the protection common function (PROT_COMM†). The failure signal of the PROT_COMM is transferred to the automatic supervision function. Relay application: Protection common †Note: see Chapter (→p.
Page 726 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.27 Supervision of disconnector contacts (DS fail) Detecting the DS operation failure is achieved with the service of the protection common function (PROT_COMM†). The failure signal of the PROT_COMM is transferred to the automatic supervision function. Relay application: Protection common †Note: see Chapter (→p.
Page 727 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.28 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error) Network communication module is monitored every 60 seconds; the error message is screened if the one does not operate correctly. Communication Protocol: LAN operation †Note: see Chapter (→p. 741), or Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module (→p.
Page 728 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.29 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) LAN communication error† is detected by pinging for the addresses instructed. Communication Protocol: LAN operation †Note: see Chapter (→p. 741), or Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module (→p. 528). Error level Error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error;...
Page 729 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.30 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error) LRE operation is checked and the error message is screened when the LRE does not operate correctly or wrong data is written in the FPGA. Communication Protocol: LAN operation †Note: see Chapter (→p.
Page 730 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.31 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error) A setting error can be detected if contradictory data has been set in the memory. Error messages are shown depending on a kind of the communication protocols. Error level The default error level has set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can change it using setting [CHK_CMLV:LVl];...
Page 731 6F2T0200 (0.15) • The second of that (i.e., “0004”) is a reason (see Table 10.2-63), and it turns out the 61850 initialization. • The top right and the middle left parts are the Data ID of the reason (i.e., “51200131” and “03011001”; the user can combine them into “512001 3103011001”).
Page 732 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.32 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) Publishing error in the IEC 61850 communication† is detected when a GOOSE message is not received. Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication †Note: see Chapter (→p. 751). Error level Error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error; default), but the user can change it with setting [CHK_GOOSERCV:LVl].
Page 733 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.33 Aux. contacts monitoring (DPOS faulty or undefined) When signals of an external device (i.e., a circuit breaker) are provided in a pair of auxiliary contacts , the signals may be grouped into four states: Open, Fault, Undefined, and Closed. This is because, two different kinds of N/C and N/O contacts operates in the other way around;...
Page 734 6F2T0200 (0.15) Error message (iii) When the function operates and detects error, an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD screen. Table 10.2-67 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DPOS Message and level Meaning of the information XXXX* undefine ‘Undefine”...
Page 735 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10.2.34 Supervision of board connection (Board error) This supervises, as it were, whether a module is properly connected (i.e., supervising the connection of MV-BI2 module, mainly. This is because the MV-BI1 has binary inputs, but does not have output circuit [except for the alarm output of fail]. See p. 534). Sending and receiving signals between HMI-VCT-CPU-BIO modules are monitored by this, and a connection error will be judged if those signals for sending and receiving are interrupted.
Page 736 6F2T0200 (0.15) Other supervision tasks Trip circuit supervision (TCS) 10.3.1 Trip circuit supervision (TCS) can issue an alarm when there is a control circuit failure for tripping breaker. It can be triggered by power supply loss on trip circuit, or open circuit, regarding the control circuit connection, can induce the alarm.
Page 737 6F2T0200 (0.15) Applications Example1 (Figure 10.3-2) shows BI1 and BI2 signals are connected at “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1” and “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2”. When trip circuit is healthy, small current will flow on BI circuits†, CB auxiliary contacts, and trip coil. We can observe the small current when CB is open or CB are closed.
Page 738 6F2T0200 (0.15) Trip circuit ( + ) Protection 8000011BB0 relay Binary input 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 & circuit 8000011B60 8000011BB1 TC1_FAIL 800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 0.4s 0.4s 8000011BB2 800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND & OPT-On ≥1 TCS1-EN CB closed status signal Trip coil ( − ) LCP & GIS Figure 10.3-3 TCS example2 Settings Table 10.3-1 Settings for TCS...
Page 739 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ TCS(Function ID: 482001) Element ID Name Description 8400051BB0 TC5_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit5 fail signal1 8400051BB1 TC5_FAIL_SIGNAL2 Trip circuit5 fail signal2 8400051BB2 TC5_FAIL_COND TC5 fail condition 8500061B60 TC6_FAIL Trip circuit6 fail 8500061BB0 TC6_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit6 fail signal1 8500061BB1 TC6_FAIL_SIGNAL2 Trip circuit6 fail signal2...
Page 740 6F2T0200 (0.15) Error level (ii) Error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error; default), but the user can change it with settings [CHK_TCS1:LVL] to [CHK_TCS6:LVL]. Remember that the user needs to set On setting [CHK_TCS1:Sw] to [CHK_TCS6:Sw]. Error message (iii) When detecting an error, the error message will be shown on LCD screen.
Page 741 6F2T0200 (0.15) Sigma Iy monitoring 10.3.2 Sigma_Iy monitoring function (i.e., sigma_Iy function) is provided in order that the circuit breaker should be supervised. Flowing current at CB will be measured at every tripping; respective flowing current amounts are integrated in the function. Consequently, the user can check the CB interruption capability in the function.
Page 742 6F2T0200 (0.15) Settings Table 10.3-4 Setting of SIGMA_IY Setting items Range Unit Contents Default SIGMA_IY-EN Off / On Enabling Sigma Iy function operation SIGMA_IY-AEN Off / On Enabling Sigma Iy alarming SIGMA_IY-Alarm 1.0 - 100000000.0 Alarm level in Sigma Iy function 10000.0 SIGMA_IY-Y 1.0 - 2.0...
Page 743 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operating time alarm (OPTA) 10.3.3 Operating time alarm (OPTA) function is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. The function checks that CB opens properly after IED outputs CB trip signal. If CB does not open after a certain time has passed since IED outputted CB trip signal, operating time alarm (OPTA) function issues an alarm.
Page 744 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals Signal monitoring points ◆ OPTA (Function ID: 484081) Element ID Name Description 8000001B60 OPTA_FAIL Operating time alarm 8000001BB0 OPTA_RESET_COMMAND Command to release latched OPTA_FAIL signal Connection point on PLC logic ◆ OPTA (Function ID: 484081) Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0...
Page 745 6F2T0200 (0.15) Counter value monitoring 10.3.4 Chapter Monitoring function: Statics data The IED has the general counter function shown in (→p. 666). The counter value monitoring is a function to monitor whether the value of a general counter exceeds a specific value. If the value of the counter exceeds a specific value, the counter value monitoring function issues an alarm.
Page 746 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting Setting of CHK_ACC1 (Function ID: 220E01) Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes CHK_ACC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch --- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) / CHK_ ACC1:Lvl Serious error Error level Minor error / Alarm/ Warning Setting of CHK_BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221103) Setting item Range...
Page 747 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of CHK_V2 (Function ID: 221A01) Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes CHK_V2:Sw Off / On Enable switch --- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) / CHK_V2:Lvl Error level Minor error Minor error / Alarm / Warning CHK_V2:Timer 10s –...
Page 748 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of CHK_PLC_DAT (Function PLC_DAT: 223202) Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch --- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) / Minor error CHK_PLC_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error / Alarm / Warning Setting of CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602) Setting item Range...
Page 749 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of CHK_DPOS (Function ID: 229101) Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes Enable switch to supervising CHK_DPOS72:Sw Off / On the DPOS72 --- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) / Error level for undefined error CHK_DPOS72:ULvl Alarm Minor error / Alarm / Warning at DPOS72...
Page 750 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of CHK_BOARD_CONN(22E001) Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes --- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) / CHK_LRE:Lvl Error level Serious error (Comm) Minor error / Alarm/ Warning Setting of CHK_CNT1,CHK_CNT2,CHK_CNT3,CHK_CNT4 (223801, 223802, 223803, 223804) Setting item Range Contents Default setting value...
Page 751 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_ROMRAM (Function ID: 220101) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter 3210001001 RESULT Check result 3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_SUM (Function ID: 220201) Element ID Name Description 3210101001 CHECKSUM 3210111001...
Page 752 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_ECC (Function ID: 220602) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_ SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001...
Page 753 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_SETTING (Function ID: 221501) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701) Element ID Name Description 32E0001001 CHKPOINT Test point 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT...
Page 754 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_ VTF (Function ID: 221C01) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001...
Page 755 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602) Element ID Name Description EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 execute counter RESULT 3210001001 check result RES_INST 3210011001 check result(instant) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_ CMLV (Function ID: 224001) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT...
Page 756 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_LAN1/2 (Function ID: 220D01, 220D02) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant) Signal monitoring point ◆ CHK_TCS (Function ID: 223B01 to 223B06) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT...
Page 757 6F2T0200 (0.15) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant) ◆ Signal monitoring point CHK_BOARD_CONN(22E001) Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001...
Page 758 6F2T0200 (0.15) 11 Communication protocol Contents Pages Pages Forcibly signal control Modbus Use for point to point test Application interface Modbus RTU IEC 61850 communication Modbus TCP Selection of IEC61850 operation Modbus function 61850 engineering Modbus structure 61850 setting How to manage Modbus data file About 61850 How to map signals to addresses Edition 1 (Legacy edition)
Page 759 6F2T0200 (0.15) Protocol selection LAN modules are provided for the IEC61850 and other communication†, and an optional serial module‡ will be provided for the Modbus RTU or IEC60870-5-103 slave communication. Figure 11.1-1 illustrates the IED has IEC61850, IEC103 and Modbus, and the user can select one of them using SLAVE PROTOCOL setting of Setting sub-menu.
Page 760 6F2T0200 (0.15) LAN operation LAN address (IP address) 11.2.1 The IED can have the communication with “Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”. The user can set the information about IP addresses and other TCP/IP. Table 11.2-1 shows the setting items provided for the LAN†. These setting values have been included in the CID file of the IEC61850.
Page 761 At the destination, either frames being arrived later is removed. Substation computer Operator workstation Data Port A Port B Destination RedBox‡ A-Frame LAN_A B-Frame LAN_B TOSHIBA RedBox‡ Tx Rx Tx Rx TOSHIBA Port A Port B LAN module LAN module (C11) (C12) Port A Port B...
Page 762 6F2T0200 (0.15) Source Destination TOSHIBA IED1 Substation Computer Operator Workstation Data Data ENTER Data Cancel Port B Port A Port B Port A Port B Port A CLEAR B-Frame B-Frame A-Frame A-Frame A-Frame Ring LAN1 A-Frame A-Frame B-Frame B-Frame B-Frame...
Page 763 6F2T0200 (0.15) time after the entry removed from the duplicate table. The setting value also should be taken account of the differences of the communication speeds between LANs. Supervision (iv) The communication supervisor function is available in PRP and HSR. The user can have following settings: Setting [LineCheckInterval]: is the setting of the interval time to send supervision frames cyclically.
Page 764 6F2T0200 (0.15) IP setting example [RedundantMode]=PRP or HSR (vi) When PRP or HSR is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply single IP address in the IED. The table below shows that both Port A and B have the same IP address. Table 11.2-2 Default IP address for PRP/HSR operation GR-TIEMS®...
Page 765 6F2T0200 (0.15) Redundant LAN (RSTP operation) 11.2.3 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), defined in the IEEE 802.1D, is ready to operate in the IED, when the user set RSTP for scheme switch [RedundantMode]. Overview ‘Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)’ is designed to achieve LAN bridge connections in stable. The RSTP choose one of bridges as the root and BPDU data (called ‘Bridge Protocol Data Unit) is exchanged periodically over RPST network.
Page 766 6F2T0200 (0.15) Settings [PortA_AdminEdge] and [PortA_AutoEdge] †: are provided for a port, which is able to operate as ‘Edge’. Edge will not be joined for the spanning tree computation, so Edge port is able to have the communication immediately when the LAN connection is started (link-up;...
Page 767 6F2T0200 (0.15) Settings 11.2.4 Setting of TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201) Default setting Setting item Range Contents Notes value IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First IP address in IED 192.168.1.11 Port A SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – Subnet mask 255.255.255.1 (C1) GATEWAY1 0 –...
Page 768 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signals (DataID) 11.2.5 Signal monitoring points ◆ TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201) Element ID Name Description 3130001001 CH1_USING Port A is operating 3130011001 CH2_USING Port B is operating 3010001150 MAC1_OCT1 MAC1 address octet 1 3010001151 MAC1_OCT2 MAC1 address octet 2 3010001152 MAC1_OCT3 MAC1 address octet 3...
Page 769 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring points ◆ PRP_HSR (Function ID: 342001) Element ID Name Description 3211061001 PortA_Recv frames received over Port A(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT) 3211071001 PortB_Recv frames received over Port B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT) Signal monitoring points ◆...
Page 770 Data IDs; hence, the user is able to connect the Data IDs with the required LNs using the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided Engineering tool by Toshiba. For the GR-TIEMS, see Chapter (→p. 585). ‡Note: Before using the IEC 61850 communications feature provided within the IED, the...
Page 771 6F2T0200 (0.15) conformance-statement (MICS). The MICS provides the user with information for the LNs provided within the IED; the PICS provides the user with information to enable the IED to communicate with both SAS and other devices. See Appendix:IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS (→p.
Page 772 6F2T0200 (0.15) About protocol 11.3.1 The IED dynamically generates Logical Nodes, Data sets and control blocks defined in CID file upon boot-up. We shall discuss the configuration procedure to set the data in CID files later. For the IEC 61850 communication, the IED consists of multiple logical devices and logical nodes.
Page 773 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 11.3-2 Function groups in 61850 Examples of IED applications Logical Functions grouped in to provide protection/control node Communication methods 61850 functions for the power defined in serviced in 61850 system 61850 Overvoltage relay (OV) PTOV Buffered Report Overcurrent relay (OC) PTOC Buffered Report...
Page 774 6F2T0200 (0.15) Legacy IEC61850 (i.e., 61850 Editon1) It is early edition for the IEC61850 standard. This edition is bundled in all 61850 software. 61850 Edition1 with option (ii) When the IED has the IEC61850 Edition1 with Option, the IED can have private object, which can handle DataUpdate Trigger.
Page 775 6F2T0200 (0.15) Communication service 11.3.2 All essential data transmission methods are summarized in Abstract communication service interface (ACSI); the IED application from communication stack is separated by the ACSI. The user can map an interface to a communication stack using Specific communication service mapping (SCSM).
Page 776 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 11.3-4 Data structures in the GOOSE Logical Device Category “System” Other Logical device (e.g., “Relay”) Data Model System Relay DataSet “GOOSEDS” LLN0 GGIO1 Ind1..16 GoCB LLN0 LPHD1 GoCB PTRC The DataSet “GOOSEDS” is fixed …. LPHD1 GGIO Data set Fixed (Not configurable) Configurable...
Page 777 6F2T0200 (0.15) Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) (vii) MMS is an application layer protocol that provides data transmission between IEDs, which performs monitoring and controlling; it can provide reliability for the data transmission. The MMS operates in the international standardized messaging system that are made of TCP/IP and Ethernet.
Page 778 6F2T0200 (0.15) How to manage engineering work 11.3.3 An IED can have multiple logical devices, which represents protection and control functions. Each logical device has Logical Nodes (LN), Datasets, Report Control Block (RCB), GOOSE Control Block (GCB), GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe function. Figure 11.3-4 illustrates the data structure in the IED.
Page 779 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connect PC to IED via LAN or USB Start GR-TIEMS engineering tool Add Substation, Voltage level, Bay and IED to the project tree (→see Chap. 11.3.3(i)) Select an IED to manage IEC61850 configuration file (→see Chap. 11.3.3(i)) Choose a required 61850 edition from the pull-down list (→see Chap.
Page 780 6F2T0200 (0.15) Creating and opening project Creation of project file If the user has an existing project, it can be found in user’s project folder. If the user does not have the project, create a new project. Figure 11.3-6 shows how to open an existing project or create a new project.
Page 781 6F2T0200 (0.15) Choice of 61850 edition number (ii) Select IEC 61850 tool from the menu of Configuration tool, as shown in Figure 11.3-8. When the user can see the edition list†, select a required one from the list‡. Then, the user can see the edition number at the header on IEC61850 tool screen, or the bottom of the GR-TIEMS main screen.
Page 782 6F2T0200 (0.15) Check to see that four engineering screens are appeared: • Logical Node Screen • Signal List Screen • GOOSE Publish Screen • GOOSE Subscribe Screen Figure 11.3-9 IEC 61850 screens GRE200 (1,2) - 763 -...
Page 783 6F2T0200 (0.15) IEC 61850 configuration files (iii) Substation configuration language (SCL) files are generated by the configuration in the IEC 61850 protocol. The SCL files are used to exchange the configuration data in different manufacture tools. Two types of files are used for exchanging data in Table 11.3-5. Table 11.3-5 Types of SCL files SCL file Description...
Page 784 6F2T0200 (0.15) should check whether the required signals are mapped in the default configuration. *Note: There is no default configuration for GOOSE subscription. If GOOSE subscribe function is required, then a new configuration has to be done. To verify the signals configured for the IEC 61850 protocol, the user should check the mapped data, Dataset or Report Control list.
Page 785 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 11.3-12 DataSet list As shown in the above figure, “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already mapped in the Dataset “STAT1”. 3. To check, if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB, Right click on “LLN0” and select Edit Report Control, then Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 11.3-13 .
Page 786 6F2T0200 (0.15) Mapping signals in signal list to Logical Nodes (iv) The user can add or modify signal mapping to the LN variable. The following section describes how to modify the mapped data if the user wants to add signals, which are sent using Report or GOOSE.
Page 787 6F2T0200 (0.15) Edit Logical Node If the required LN or variable is not available in the IED, the user should follow the steps below to add or modify the Logical Node: 1. To add new LN or to edit the variable of an existing LN, Right click Prot and select Add Logical Node or select Edit Logical Node.
Page 788 6F2T0200 (0.15) Edit DataSet Dataset can be edited or a new dataset can be added for the LNs as shown in Figure 11.3-17. For editing the DataSet, follow the steps below: 1. Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet, DataSet List window appears as shown in Figure 11.3-17.
Page 789 6F2T0200 (0.15) Edit Report Control Block (RCB) Report Control Block (RCB) is used to send report from IEDs to client. If the user wishes to assign the DataSet to Report Control Block, follow the steps below: 1. Under the LN tree structure, select Prot, Right click LLN0 and select Edit Report Control.
Page 790 6F2T0200 (0.15) Edit GOOSE Control Block GOOSE control block is used to exchange information between IEDs. GOOSE messages are used for interlock operation between IEDs in order to protect the electrical system. GGIO1 is used for sending high-speed GOOSE messages. The DataID assigned to GGIO1 is sent within 3ms.
Page 791 6F2T0200 (0.15) Edit GOOSE Publish The signals assigned to GGIO1 variables are published automatically by default. The GGIO1 data set is fixed and is pre-configured in GOOSE Publish screen. If the user assign signals to other GGIO variables (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3) for GOOSE publish operation, then the user needs to add those variables in the GOOSE Publish screen.
Page 792 6F2T0200 (0.15) Edit GOOSE subscribe GOOSE subscribe function is configured to receive GOOSE messages published by other IEDs. Figure 11.3-21 exemplifies the GOOSE Subscribe screen; the user can select the necessary signals to be added. For example, “Bay1 GRE200-1” is the current IED;...
Page 793 6F2T0200 (0.15) For example, to let a device execute “Select”, “Operate” and “Cancel” commands from the sever through “CSWI4” and transmit the information to an IED, the user should map an input point (Data ID) to several variables of “CSWI4” (See Figure 11.3-22).
Page 794 6F2T0200 (0.15) Writing the configuration file to IED When the user has completed editing the configuration files, the user can write the IEC61850 configuration files, as shown in Figure 11.3-23 Write to IED Follow the below steps to write the file in the IED. Save the current project in the PC.
Page 795 6F2T0200 (0.15) Set communication parameters, if needed. Figure 11.3-25 Communication parameter settings Confirm the edition number written in the IED. Note: The user can check the edition number through on the LCD screen. Therefore, the user should confirm the edition number written in the IED too. See Chap. 11.3.3(vi) to show the LCD screen.
Page 796 6F2T0200 (0.15) Confirmation of the edition number of IEC61850 (vi) Figure 11.3-26 shows how to confirm the edition number, if the IED is supporting several editions of IEC61850. The user can also confirm the version, when the IED is running in IEC61850 configuration file.
Page 797 ‘CommTerm’ signal† will not conform to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this function. That is, this function can be availed on the server communication provided by TOSHIBA. †Note: For example, Figure 11.3-27 shows the signal flow between a substation computer (SC), an IED and a target device (e.g.
Page 798 6F2T0200 (0.15) provided by Toshiba is able to accept the actual operation time; hence, the setting ‘CommTerm’ is required in the Toshiba communication. The user should also note that Off is set for the scheme switch [TCMD] as the default setting.
Page 799 6F2T0200 (0.15) communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to avoid the influence, we recommend the user to test bad receptions for a particular IED using the GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED under test i.e.
Page 800 IED. Optionally (O), or conditional mandatory(C) are used depending on the environment states. Note: The IEDs of GR-200 series do not carry those attributes—overflow, out Of Range, oscillatory, old Data, inconsistent, source, and operator Blocked. Note: Detail quality attributes (e.g., overflow, outOfRange, etc. marked with “N”) are not included in the Qual_Validity.
Page 801 6F2T0200 (0.15) Qual_validity Qual_validity (61850 signal: No. 301001 3110041005) is a signal provided for a common quality information. It can be useful if some ‘q’ attributes (it’s defined in Quality type) should belong to a common quality. Both severe and non-severe errors are included; therefore, that signal value will be changed whenever errors (including alarm and warning incidents) are detected.
Page 802 6F2T0200 (0.15) Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication 11.3.8 IEDs are able to monitor the communication using GOOSE packets, which other IEDs have sent their information via the network. If the IED can receive the GOOSE packets, the IED can display them on the information list. Figure 11.3-30 illustrates an example of the GOOSE monitoring list;...
Page 803 Feature of IEC61850 Edition1 option 11.3.9 The IED can have Private logical nodes, which are provided in Editon1_option, which are designed in Toshiba private specification exclusively. The user can select and add the following Data object: Table 11.3-9 LD class in Editon1 option...
Page 804 6F2T0200 (0.15) 11.3.10 Setting Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001) Unit Default setting Setting item Range Contents Notes value GOINT 1 to 120 sec. Maximum GOOSE resend interval 850BLK Off/On IEC 61850 enable/disable 850AUT Off/On Authentication of IEC 61850 association 850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec.
Page 805 6F2T0200 (0.15) 11.3.11 Signal (Data ID) Monitoring point (for Editio1 and Editon2) ◆ 61850 (Function ID: 301001) Description Element ID Name 0010001001 61850STAT Status of IEC 61850(T:Running, F:Stop) 3100001440 INCOMINGPKT#0 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#0 3100011440 INCOMINGPKT#1 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#1 3100021440 INCOMINGPKT#2 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#2...
Page 806 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Edition 2) ◆ GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101) Description Element ID Name 74000B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#11 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74000C6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#12 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74000D6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#13 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74000E6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#14 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74000F6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#15 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400106470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#16 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message...
Page 807 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Edition 2) ◆ GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101) Description Element ID Name 7400356470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#53 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400366470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#54 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400376470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#55 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400386470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#56 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400396470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#57 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74003A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#58 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message...
Page 808 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Edition 2) ◆ GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101) Description Element ID Name 74005F6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#95 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400606470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#96 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400616470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#97 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400626470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#98 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400636470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#99 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400646470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#100 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message...
Page 809 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Edition 2) ◆ GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101) Description Element ID Name 7400896470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#137 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74008A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#138 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74008B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#139 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74008C6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#140 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74008D6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#141 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74008E6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#142 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message...
Page 810 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Edition 2) ◆ GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101) Description Element ID Name 7400B36470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#179 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400B46470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#180 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400B56470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#181 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400B66470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#182 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400B76470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#183 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400B86470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#184 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message...
Page 811 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Edition 2) ◆ GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101) Description Element ID Name 7400DD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#221 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400DE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#222 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400DF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#223 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400E06470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#224 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400E16470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#225 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400E26470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#226 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message...
Page 812 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Edition 2) ◆ GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101) Description Element ID Name 7401076470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#263 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401086470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#264 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401096470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#265 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74010A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#266 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74010B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#267 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 74010C6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#268 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message...
Page 813 6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring point (for Edition 2) ◆ GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101) Description Element ID Name 7401316470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#305 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401326470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#306 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401336470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#307 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401346470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#308 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401356470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#309 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401366470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#310 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message...
Page 814 6F2T0200 (0.15) Modbus communication About protocol 11.4.1 Modbus is the communication protocol for controlling programmable logic controllers, which were standardized for industrial electrical devices. That Modbus protocol allows connecting devices to the supervisory device over the same network. The communication is carried out with query and response messages, and the messages include an address, a function code.
Page 815 (→p. 981) for more details. Address numbers are 00000~65536 in the Modbus standard, but the GR-200 series IEDs’ 24000~65535 are not used; they are reserved for the future use. Blank addresses are provided for users’ purposes. Selection of Modbus protocol 11.4.2...
Page 816 Current quantities, voltage quantities, etc. ⚫ Event status: Events, fault modes, counters, etc. ⚫ Time: Clock setting /synchronization ⚫ †Note: The GR-200 series IEDs do not support to applications (control functions, such as, DPOS etc.) in the Modbus protocol. GRE200 (1,2) - 797 -...
Page 817 6F2T0200 (0.15) Modbus serial (Modbus RTU) 11.4.4 The serial port (RS-485 module) is provided for the Modbus RTU. The user can set Modbus- RTU in the IED when the setting [MODBUS_SELECT] = Serial. Communication MODBUS 10:48 10:48 > MODBUS_BLK USBCOM >...
Page 818 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 11.4-7 Message frame over Data link Address field of IED device: The IEDs’ identifiers are set by setting [MODBUS_ADDR]. They have to be a unique number. Each can be selected among 1 - 247. The [MODBUS_ADDR] has a default setting address (see section 11.4.10). Function code field: It is a query/response command code and is transferred over the network.
Page 819 6F2T0200 (0.15) Modbus TCP 11.4.5 The Modbus TCP can support the communication over the Ethernet. The Ethernet provides the Modbus TCP (see Figure 11.4-1). TCP and IP layers detect errors over the Ethernet, so the error check one is omitted here. The Modbus TCP will be set when the setting [MODBUS_SELECT] = TCP.
Page 820 6F2T0200 (0.15) TCP/IP frame (ii) Over the TCP/IP network, the MBAP generates the function code field and data field, as shown in Figure 11.4-10. Address field of IED: The TCP/IP frame includes the IP header, so the address of the IED is identified with the IP address.
Page 821 6F2T0200 (0.15) Modbus model 11.4.6 Modbus data and its corresponding structure are shown in the below. It illustrates IED (slave) hardware and applications are monitored by the substation computer (master). Application model A practical model is shows in Figure 11.4-11. An IED is installed by a transmission line; The substation computer is connected with the IED by the network.
Page 822 6F2T0200 (0.15) Modbus functions 11.4.7 Standard The functions of the Modbus model are divided into four types: [1] Coil, [2] Discrete input, [3] Input Register, and [4] Holding resister. Each function type is designed to read/write the IED signal† (memory in slave) from the substation computer request (i.e., master query). Table 11.4-2FC types and addresses in the IED Function types Data type (bits length)
Page 823 6F2T0200 (0.15) computer (slave) can access IED signals (e.g., the master can set On/Off/On/On[1011] in the slave Modbus addresses [00003~00006] by a FC(0x0F) query) [Type2] Discrete input (Function code: 0x02) The Discrete input type is just provided to read an IED signal. The default mapping—provided by the manufacture—is managed in order that the application signals are transferred to the substation computer.
Page 824 This is designed for that an IED can return its own IED model and type. [D] Encapsulated Interface Transport (Function code: 0x2B) This is designed for that an IED can return its own product information. GR-200 series IED supports the product information in Table 11.4-5. Table 11.4-5 Encapsulated Interface Transport Type and Object Object...
Page 825 6F2T0200 (0.15) How to manage Modbus data file 11.4.8 The user can map IED signals for Modbus addresses using the GR-TIEMS. The mapping data (i.e., Modbus configuration file), which is generated in the user’s PC by the GR-TIMES, can be transferred for the IED, when the user has completed the IED engineering work.
Page 826 6F2T0200 (0.15) Creation of a project in GR-TIEMS If the user does not have a project, a new one has to be created in the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.4-15 shows how to open it or create a new one. Figure 11.4-16 illustrates new IED has been added on the project tree.
Page 827 6F2T0200 (0.15) Saving mapping data in PC (ii) When the user configured user’s own data, the user can save it separately. Click File menu and select Export CSV…, and the GR-TIMES saves the data file in CSV format. Saving the data can also be carried out when the CSV icon is clicked. CSV icon File menu Modbus mapping data saved in CSV file...
Page 828 6F2T0200 (0.15) Reading Modbus data from IED (iv) When the Modbus data—was already created and written in the IED—is required read (import) in the GR-TIMES, select “Read from IED” menu, as shown in Figure 11.4-19. Read from IED Modbus data reading ...
Page 829 6F2T0200 (0.15) How to map IED signals to Modbus addresses 11.4.9 The Figure 11.4-12 is illustrated in order that an IED signal was connected for a Modbus address, so the user has to map a Data ID for a Modbus address on the Modbus slave screen; the operation the drag &...
Page 830 6F2T0200 (0.15) [Type1] Mapping about Coil type Figure 11.4-22 illustrates a mapping example for the Modbus Coil. In the figure, signals (Data IDs) of the OC function are mapped for the Modbus address (00002). The signal list screen allows the user chose signals on (Dragged); and then, the user can release them on the Modbus Address screen (Dropped).
Page 831 6F2T0200 (0.15) [Type2] Mapping about Discrete input type Figure 11.4-23 illustrates a mapping example for the Modbus Discrete input. In the figure, a signal (Data ID) of the OC function are mapped for the Modbus address (012001) Modbus screen in Simple mode The Discrete input type is Read-Only mode.
Page 832 6F2T0200 (0.15) [Type3] Mapping about Input register type Figure 11.4-24 illustrates a mapping example for the Modbus Input register. In the figure, a signal (Data ID) of the TCPIP_DRV function are mapped for the Modbus address (10000). Modbus screen in Simple mode The Input register type is Read-Only mode.
Page 833 6F2T0200 (0.15) [Type4] Mapping about Holding register type Figure 11.4-25 illustrates an example mapping for the Modbus Holding register. In the figure, two independent signals are mapped for the Modbus address (18000) Modbus screen in Simple mode The Holding register type is R/W mode. Modbus address: 18000 Dropped Write Holding register...
Page 834 6F2T0200 (0.15) [A] Mapping signals about Exception status (Function code: 0x07) Figure 11.4-26 illustrates an example mapping for the Modbus Exception status. In the figure, signals of CB, DS, and TC failures are mapped for that Specific function code selected Read Exception Status selected Dropped Dragged...
Page 835 6F2T0200 (0.15) [B] Mapping signals about Diagnostic register (Function code: 0x08) Figure 11.4-27 illustrates an example mapping for the Modbus Diagnostic register. In the figure, a signal of CTF detected is mapped for that. Specific function code selected Return Diagnostics Register selected Dropped Dragged Figure 11.4-27 Example setting of Modbus Diagnostic resister...
Page 836 6F2T0200 (0.15) 11.4.10 Setting Modbus_Slave (Function ID: 303001) Default setting Setting item Range Contents Units Notes value MODBUS_BLK Off / On — Blocking the slave communication MODBUS_ADDR 1 – 247 — Slave address (for Modbus SERIAL) MODBUS_SELECT TCP / SERIAL —...
Page 837 6F2T0200 (0.15) 11.4.11 Signal (Data ID) Monitoring point ◆ MODBUS_SYNC (Function ID: 303201) Description Element ID Name 330000E450 MODBUS TimeVal Modbus Time value Monitoring point ◆ MODBUS_Slave (Function ID: 303001) Description Element ID Name 3100001001 Modbus Slave Status of Modbus Slave 3100011440 ReceivePackets The received number of Modbus packets...
Page 838 6F2T0200 (0.15) IEC 60870-5-103 communication The IEC 60870-5-103 standard is one of the communication protocols when measuring data is required to communicate between the control system and an IED. The communication is carried out with RS485 or Fiber optic interface†. The data, measured and status, is transferred over the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Page 839 6F2T0200 (0.15) Overview 11.5.2 About the IEC 60870-5-103 standard communication, the user has to create the data with regard that protocol, which is grouped into a slave and a master†. The user can edit the slave Data using the GR-TIEMS. †Note: Creating the master is not available in GR-200 serises IEDs.
Page 840 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 11.5-1 Configuration items in IEC 60870-5-103 Items Contents Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Time-tagged message Transmission condition(Data ID), COT INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Data ID), Time-tagged measurands COT, Type of measurands quantities General command INF, FUN, Control condition(Data ID) Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurands, Measurands Type of measurands quantities...
Page 841 6F2T0200 (0.15) Requirements in the Master station 11.5.3 In the master station of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the following specifications should be followed in the respective IEDs: Polling cycle: 150ms or longer Timeout time (time to re-sending the request frame to the IED): 100ms IEC103 master Data request Polling cycle:...
Page 842 6F2T0200 (0.15) Interoperability 11.5.4 The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol provides a physical layer and an application layer for the communication to secure the interoperability. Physical layer Either an electrical or optical interface† is defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard. Electrical interface of RS-485 When a RS485 module is selected for the IEC 60870-5-103 serial, 32 IEDs are possible to connect in.
Page 843 6F2T0200 (0.15) Communication interface in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard 11.5.5 Spontaneous events When events are generated in the IED, they are transferred to the master station. The event transferred is grouped into the Function-type (FUN) and the Information numbers (INF). General interrogation (ii) “GI request”...
Page 844 6F2T0200 (0.15) Editing data of the configuration 11.5.6 Common setting When the “Common setting” item is selected on the start screen of the IEC 60870-5-103 configuration, the “Common setting” setting screen is displayed. Settings common to each frame can be performed in this screen. Setting file remark The remark of the setting file is used for managing the version of the configuration data file.
Page 845 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function type of system functions This setting is used to set Function type (FUN) of System functions† (INF=0 to 5). The FUN can be set individually per the frame provided. When clicking the “Change all FUNs”, confirmation dialog box appears. When clicking “OK”, FUNs of all frames are changed to these setting values.
Page 846 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of time-tagged messages (ii) In Time-tagged message frame of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, event information and status information are responded for Class 1 request from the upper system (station). The IED provides event information and status information by Time-tagged message frame about the signal assigned to a Data ID of the signal list.
Page 847 6F2T0200 (0.15) Oct. Item Value Remarks Cause of transmission (COT) 1/9/11/12 Customized with GR-TIEMS Common address of ASDU 1-254 Linked with Address setting Function type (FUN) 0-255 Customized with GR-TIEMS Information number (INF) 0-255 Customized with GR-TIEMS Double point information (DPI) Customized with GR-TIEMS /(0)/1/2/(3)/ Millisecond (low)
Page 848 6F2T0200 (0.15) IEC 60870-5-103 communication. Signal name / signal description The Data ID† (say, signal number) showing the status of the frame is set from the signal list in the IED. If the setting value (signal No.) is “0”, all setting items related events are disable and the frame is not provided.
Page 849 6F2T0200 (0.15) transformer differential protection not used Line differential protection not used not used not used not used not used not used not used Generic function type Global function type DPI/Off, DPI/On Double-point information (DPI) is set using the menu as follows: DPI/Off: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No.
Page 850 6F2T0200 (0.15) Note: TR and TL are set in Common setting. Note: Settings of the test mode is described later. (2) If one of COT is specified per No., the frame is always supplemented with the specified COT regardless of cause of transmission. (3) If COT=9 is specified, the frame become the object of GI and is sent back when the GI request frame is received.
Page 851 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting for time-tagged measurands (iii) For Time-tagged measurand frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, event information supplemented with numerical information are responded for Class 1 request from upper system (station). The IED can provide event information, which is converted the numerical information in metering table according to user setting weight, by using Time-tagged measurand frame about the signal assigned (i.e., the Data ID).
Page 852 6F2T0200 (0.15) Oct. Item Value Remarks Function type (FUN) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS Information number (INF) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS Short-circuit location (SCL) Customized by GR-TIEMS Trigger condition to calculate RET is Relative time (RET) 0-65535 customized by GR-TIEMS. Trigger condition of FAN increment is Fault number (FAN) 0-65535 customized by GR-TIEMS.
Page 853 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function type (FUN) is set referring to the Table 11.5-4. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting. Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set.
Page 854 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting for General commands (iv) Using General command frame of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the remote control is able to execute relay applications. As receiving a general command frame, the IED is controlled by the Data ID of the signal list. When the “General command”...
Page 855 6F2T0200 (0.15) Primary Secondary station station General Command Class 1 Command ACK/NACK Figure 11.5-10 Command receiving sequence In the transmission format of General command (Type ID=20), customized items are shown in Table 11.5-10. Table 11.5-10 General command (Type ID=20) Oct. Item Value Remarks...
Page 856 6F2T0200 (0.15) Oct. Item Value Remarks Control field 08H+ACD+ Address 1-254 Setting from the relay Type identification (Type ID) Customized by GR-TIEMS Variable structure qualifier Cause of transmission (COT) 20/21 Customized by GR-TIEMS Common address of ASDU 1-254 Linked with Address setting Function type (FUN) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS...
Page 857 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function type (FUN) applied to a command response frame is set referring to Table 11.5-13. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting. DCO/Sig Off Name, Signal Off Desc., DCO Signal On Name, Signal On Desc., Inverse “Sig off”...
Page 858 6F2T0200 (0.15) Valid time is used to set the time (ms) to control the command output signal. The command output signal is controlled based on the control scheme described in section 11.5.6(iv)-5 for the setting time after receiving General command, and is reset by communication side after the set time.
Page 859 6F2T0200 (0.15) from the command receiving. For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” checked, Command ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = NACK Sig = 1” after the timeout setting time. Table 11.5-16 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig = NACK Sig) “Inverse”...
Page 860 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting of Measurands In Measurand frame of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, numerical information such as power system quantities are responded for Class 2 cyclic request from upper system (station). The IED can provide numerical information, which is converted the numerical information in metering table according to user setting weight.
Page 861 6F2T0200 (0.15) In the transmission format of Measurand I (Type ID=3) and Measurand II (Type ID=9), customized items are shown in Table 11.5-17. Table 11.5-17 Measurand I／Measurand II (Type ID=3／9) Oct. Item Value Remarks Start Length 8+2N Length 8+2N Start 08H+ACD+ Control field Address...
Page 862 6F2T0200 (0.15) FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting. Name Any comment with maximum eight characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication. Measurement Name/Measurement Description The Data ID corresponding to a measurand is required to select. Lower Limit/Upper Limit The established condition of IV flag is set per MEA.
Page 863 6F2T0200 (0.15) Protocol selection 11.5.7 Figure 11.5-13 shows the setting menu for the Communication. The IED can run with the IEC60870-5-103 communication after the user sets IEC103 for the setting [Slave Protocol]. Restarting the IED is required after that (i.e., you have to reset the IED by power off-on). SLAVE PROTOCOL SLAVE PROTOCOL Communication...
Page 864 6F2T0200 (0.15) Tips for settings 11.5.8 During the GR-TIEMS operation, we recommend the user to choose an appropriate file-name for the setting-file. That is, for example, when the user creates the setting file in an IED at first time, the user has to make that file including the name of “IED#1-model_01.map”. Likewise, the user has to create another file including the name of “IED#2-model_01.map”...
Page 865 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting 11.5.9 Setting of 103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001) Unit Default setting Setting item Range Contents Notes value 103ADDR 0 to 254 Slave address 103TST Off/On – IEC 60780-5-103 test mode 103BLK Off/On – IEC 60780-5-103 slave block GRE200 (1,2) - 846 -...
Page 866 6F2T0200 (0.15) 11.5.10 Signal (Data ID) Monitoring point ◆ 103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001) Description Element ID Name 3100011001 103SLV STAT 103SLV STATUS 8020011001 AG1STAT Active Group 1 status 8120021001 AG2STAT Active Group 2 status 8220031001 AG3STAT Active Group 3 status 8320041001 AG4STAT Active Group 4 status...
Page 867 6F2T0200 (0.15) USB communication The IED front panel has an USB receptacle in a B-type to connect with a local PC for engineering. The user can select a transmission speed, which is shown below, by the operation of the setting menu, as shown in Figure 11.6-1. USBCOM 10:48 USBCOM_BRATE_SW +...
Page 868 6F2T0200 (0.15) RS485 communication When the IED has an RS485 module for the communication, the user can select and set its transmission and error check parity codes. Figure 11.7-1 shows the setting screen when the RS485 module (#1) operates. RS485 10:48 RS485_1_BRATE_SW 19.2kbps...
Page 869 6F2T0200 (0.15) Miscellaneous Forcibly signal control function 11.8.1 When the point-to-point test is carried out, it is necessary to generate the original signal of the transmission signal in order to confirm that the send / receive of the transmission signal is good.
Page 870 6F2T0200 (0.15) Detail of the function (ii) The forcibly signal control function has 32 controllable signals: “OUT_FSC01” to “OUT_FSC32”. Both “Signal generation” and “signal non-generation” can be controlled. The control procedure is same as the procedure for binary input test and binary output test. It can be described in User interface: Test-submenu: F.
Page 871 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection point on PLC logic ◆ ForcSigCont (Function ID: 4C3081) Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 IN_FSC01 Forcibly Signal Control function input signal 01 800000EBB1 IN_FSC02 Forcibly Signal Control function input signal 02 800000EBB2 IN_FSC03 Forcibly Signal Control function input signal 03 800000EBCE IN_FSC31 Forcibly Signal Control function input signal 31...
Page 872: Table Of Contents
6F2T0200 (0.15) 12 User interface Contents Pages Pages Outline Time sub-menu -Front panel -Clock -LCD screen -Time zone -LEDs -Time synchronization -Function Keys -Display format -Operation Keys -Summer time(DST) HMI operation Test sub-menu -General operation -Test screen -Main-menu and sub-menu -Test mode screen -Test flag enabling screen Record sub-menu...
Page 873: Outline
6F2T0200 (0.15) Outline Users can maintenance the IED with LCD screen and several keys. PC monitor is possible when Local PC is connected with the IED via USB port. In this section, we will discuss the details of Human Machine Interface (HMI): operation keys, LEDs, Function keys, and menu- hierarchy for the LDC screen operations.
Page 874 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 12.1-1 LED labels and their color User configurable Label names Color Remarks setting Lit up when the IED IN SERVICE Green is in service. Lit up when an error ERROR is occurred. ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔...
Page 875 6F2T0200 (0.15) Operation keys By using the operation keys, the user can display records, relay status etc. Input of setting values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 12.1-2. Table 12.1-2 Features of operation keys Label Functions and Remarks Move the cursor up / Scroll up / Count up†...
Page 876: Hmi Operation
6F2T0200 (0.15) HMI operation The user can operate functions with the operation keys etc., by seeing LCD screen. Screen and LEDs during normal HMI operation "IN SERVICE" is lit up (green LED) during the IED is running, but LCD screen is blacked out. To turn on the LCD screen, press a key (except CLEAR);...
Page 877 6F2T0200 (0.15) Main Menu 10:48 10:48 _Record > OC1-EN Monitoring > Setting > _OC2-EN IO Setting > Control > OC3-EN Time > Test > OC4-EN Information > a. Main Menu b. Sub Menu Figure 12.2-1 LCD showing Main-Menu and Sub-menu Figure 12.2-2 shows the menu hierarchy.
Page 878 6F2T0200 (0.15) Figure 12.2-3 shows a symbol are changed when a sub-menu is invalid. (i.e, > → =). For example, when a subordinate setting item is valid (i.e., the user sets On for an OC_-EN item), “>” is displayed on the far right screen. If the user dose not set On for an item, “=” is displayed. Trip 10:48 10:48...
Page 879: Record Sub-Menu
6F2T0200 (0.15) Record sub-menu It is composed of sub-menus: fault record, event record, disturbance record, and clearance of all records. The user can clear records independently. Record 10:48 _Fault Record > Event Record1 > Event Record2 > Event Record3 > Disturbance Record >...
Page 880 6F2T0200 (0.15) 2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List Fault Record 10:48 sub menu. _Record List > Clear Records 3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move Fault Record cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►. 10:48 2012-07-25 >...
Page 881: Event Record
6F2T0200 (0.15) Clear all information in Fault Record 1). Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press Record 10:48 ENTER. Fault Record > Event Record 1 > Event Record 2 > Event Record 3 > Disturbance Record > _Clear all Records + 2).
Page 882: Disturbance Record
6F2T0200 (0.15) 3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items. Event Record1 10:48 #1 2012-07-25 10:48:21.223 Set. Group change #2 2012-07-25 10:20:11.021 Clear of Event Records 1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►. Record To clear all records, refer to section (i)-3.
Page 883 6F2T0200 (0.15) The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. Display of disturbance Record 1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►. Record 10:48 To clear all records, refer to section (i)-3. Fault Record >...
Page 884: Monitoring Sub-Menu
6F2T0200 (0.15) Monitoring sub-menu It is used to display IED status at present. The LCD screen can screen updated data every. The user can view the below sub-menus: Metering Binary I/O iii. Communication Relay Elements Statistics GOOSE Monitoring vii. Diagnostics Metering In “Metering”...
Page 885 6F2T0200 (0.15) which are shown in the logic level “1” or “0”. Figure 12.4-3 provides an example for circuit statues at Slot#1(i.e., Slot#1_1 and Slot#1_2). Slot#1 10:48 1/12 BI1 0 CB1 contact BI2 0 DC power sup. BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2 BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI5 0 Indi.
Page 886 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10:48 PortStatus > RedundantPacketNum > Figure 12.4-6 LAN display If a port is displayed with “UP” symbol, the port is alive; if the port is displayed with “DOWN” symbol, the port is dead (i.e., LAN cable is loosen). PortStatus PortStatus 10:48...
Page 887 6F2T0200 (0.15) 61850STAT 10:48 255.255.255.255:0 255.255.255.255:0 255.255.255.255:0 255.255.255.255:0 255.255.255.255:0 255.255.255.255:0 Figure 12.4-9 IEC61850 display MODBUS sub-menu: In case of MODBUS serial, the number of packets being sent and received packets are screened. In case of MODBUS TCP, the master's IP address and port number and the number of packets sent and received are screened.
Page 888: Statistics
6F2T0200 (0.15) Main Menu Main Menu Relay Element 10:48 10:48 10:48 1/24 Record > Metering > > ► ► _Monitoring > Binary I/O > > Setting > Communication > > IO setting > _Relay Element > > ◄ ◄ Time >...
Page 889 6F2T0200 (0.15) Power Value 10:48 0.0MWh 0.0MWh varh+ 0.0Mvarh Figure 12.4-14 Power Value display Table 12.4-1 Operation means for data reset or data revise Step Display Operation key Remark [>] Press ► key to go to the sub-menu ► Press ENTER key to execute reset or revise. After ENTER executing, a confirmation dialog screen displays.
Page 890: Goose Monitoring
6F2T0200 (0.15) Main Menu Monitoring Statistics 10:48 2/10 10:48 10:48 Record > Metering > _Counter > ► ► _Monitoring > Binary I/O > Accumulated Time > Setting > Communication > IO Setting > Relay Element > ◄ ◄ Time > _Statistics >...
Page 891: Diagnostics
6F2T0200 (0.15) GOOSE subscription information. GOOSE Monitoring 10:48 GRx200-11-603 GRx200-21-603 GRx200-31-603 Figure 12.4-18 GOOSE Monitoring display Diagnostics (vii) Error message will be published in Automatic supervision. If there are no errors, an error message is not displayed. Diagnostics 10:48 PLC data error >...
Page 892: Setting Sub-Menu
6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting sub-menu It is used to view and change settings: Recording, Metering, Communication interface, Relay application, and Monitoring. This section describes “Setting method for elements, switches, and list selection”, “Protection setting”, and others. Furthermore, the confirmation of setting, and the “On/Off”...
Page 893 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10:48 10:48 10:48 _OC1-b OC1-b OC1-b [ ENTER ] [◄] x 5 123.00000 123.00000 123.00000 OC1-c OC1-c OC1-c 1.00000 1.00000 1.00000 [►] x 5 [CANCEL] OC1-angle OC1-angle OC1-angle 45 deg 45 deg 45 deg [▲] [▼] [CANCEL] [CANCEL] 10:48 10:48 10:48...
Page 894 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56 _OC1-VTFBlk *OC1-VTFBlk Block OC1-UseFor OC1-UseFor Trip Trip OC1-OPMD OC1-OPMD 3POR 3POR Before Changing Setting After Changing Figure 12.5-3 Switch Setting Mode display To begin the setting process, press ENTER. Once the setting is changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting.
Page 895 6F2T0200 (0.15) confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. OC1-2fBlk OC1-2fBlk 10:48 23/56 10:48 10:48 _OC1-2fBlk _Non [▼] [ ENTER ] Block-3P _Block-3P OC1-VTFBlk Block-PerP Block-PerP [CANCEL] OC1-UseFor [▲] Trip [ENTER] [CANCEL] 10:48 23/56 10:48 23/56 *OC1-2fBlk *OC1-2fBlk [▼] Block-3P Block-3P _OC1-VTFBlk OC1-VTFBlk...
Page 896: Confirmation Dialog
6F2T0200 (0.15) Confirmation dialog in each sub-menu (ii) Confirmation dialogs (#1 and #2) appear in sub and lower-level menus, as shown in Figure 12.5-7 Sub-menu Sub -menu Sub -menu Case2 Setting Record Metering Communication Protection Active Group ： Copy gr.(A->B). Confirmation Group 1 Dialog #1...
Page 897: Function Key
6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting Protection Group 1 10:48 10:48 3/10 10:48 Record > Active group > Telecommunication> [►] [►] Metering > Copy gr.(A->B) > *Trip > Communication > _Group 1 > Autoreclose > _Protection > Group 2 > [◄] [◄] Counter >...
Page 898: Io Setting
6F2T0200 (0.15) Main Menu Setting Communication 10:48 10:48 10:48 Record > Record > > [►] [►] Monitoring > Metering > _IEC61850 > _Setting > _Communication > IEC103 > IO Setting > Protection > Modbus > [◄] [◄] Time > Counter >...
Page 899 6F2T0200 (0.15) On/Off function (iii) When the “Setting->Protection->Group (1 to 8)” sub-menu is displayed, the “On/OFF function” is used to hide some unnecessary settings. “On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
Page 900 6F2T0200 (0.15) operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active group and can copy the group settings. Jump to the “Element Setting Menu” if a relay setting is required. Change active group: An example for changing the active group is shown in the following figure.
Page 901 6F2T0200 (0.15) Protection Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group (A->B) 10:48 1/11 10:48 10:48 Common _A (1 – 8): [►] [▼] A (1 – 8): Active Group B (1 - 8): _B (1 - 8): *Copy Group(A->B) > [▲] [◄] Group 1 >...
Page 902 6F2T0200 (0.15) default destinations. Table 12.5-3 Function keys which are configured to navigate a menu Function Key configured Menus Metering Fault Record Event Record1 Event Record2 Event Record3 Screen jump function: To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps as shown in the figure below.
Page 903 6F2T0200 (0.15) Main Menu 10:48 10:48 Record > _OC1EN +> [ F1 ] _Monitoring > Setting > OC2EN +> IO setting > [ F1 ] Time > OC3EN +> Test > Figure 12.5-14 Operation of screen jump function To cancel the screen-jump function, follow the procedure provided in Figure 12.5-15. Note: 1) Once a screen is configured to a function key, it will not be deleted until a new screen is configured for the same function key.
Page 904 6F2T0200 (0.15) Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function 10:48 10:48 10:48 F1 Key > *Function [►] [ENTER] Screen Jump F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal F3 Key > Signal _No Assign F4 Key > No Assign [CANCEL] [◄] F5 Key >...
Page 905: Ac Analog Input
6F2T0200 (0.15) I/O setting sub-menu It is used to set or change settings: AC Analog Input (ii) Binary Input (iii) Binary Output (iv) This section explains the details of the setting method. AC analog input The user can set a ratio of each AC analog channel on VCT. The user can also match CT polarity and styles.
Page 906 6F2T0200 (0.15) Selection of CT polarity: Figure 12.6-2 shows how change the CT polarity on VCT. Pressing ▲ and ▼ and ►, go for required setting items. AC Analog Input APPL-VCT 10:48 10:48 AI#1 > Conn-CT +> [►] APPL-VCT > Conn-IeCT Secondary Conn-VT...
Page 907: Binary Input
6F2T0200 (0.15) Binary input (ii) All binary input circuits (BIs) are user-configurable; the user can set common programmable Technical logic (CPL) for each binary input circuit. (For more information of CPL, see Chapter description: Binary IO module: Binary input circuit →p.
Page 908: Binary Output
6F2T0200 (0.15) 10:48 BI1_CPL On Delay Timer + 0.000 s Off Delay Timer + 0.000 s Inverse-SW Normal Figure 12.6-6 CPL setting (Sample) Note: Setting items “On Delay timer and others” are displayed when the user sets [BI*_CPL] On. Binary output (iii) All binary output circuits (BOs) are also user-configurable;...
Page 909 6F2T0200 (0.15) 10:48 1/17 BO1_CPL Input signal1 No Assign Input Signal2 No Assign InputSignal3 No Assign Signal8 No Assign LOGIC-SW On Delay Timer + 0.000 s Off Delay Timer + 0.000 s INVERSE-SW Normal TIMER-SW Logic Timer 0.000 s FF-SW Reset Signal No Assign Figure 12.6-8 Binary output setting (Sample)
Page 910: Led
6F2T0200 (0.15) Selection and setting of LED (iv) As shown in Figure 12.1-1, the IED provides LEDs and Function-keys. The user can configure LEDs. Each LED is driven via a logic gate which can be programed to be an AND gate, OR gate or XOR gate operation.
Page 911 6F2T0200 (0.15) LED3 10:48 1/16 Color > Input signal1 No assign Input signal2 No assign Input signal8 No assign Reset signal No assign LOGIC-SW INVERSE-SW Normal TIMER-SW On Delay Timer 0.00 s Off Delay Timer + 0.00 s Logic Timer 0.00 s Figure 12.6-11 LED3 setting screen GRE200 (1,2)
Page 912: Time Sub-Menu
6F2T0200 (0.15) Time sub-menu The user can change settings of Clock function, such as time zone, time synchronizing source, format of time display and so on. Figure below shows the Time sub-menu. (For more Chapter Technical description: Clock function information, see Time 10:48 Clock...
Page 913: Time Zone
6F2T0200 (0.15) (1) Move cursor to the [ActiveSyncSrc] menu and press ►. Clock 10:00 [Time] 2012-11-21 10:00:05 *Note: When the active synchronizing source is not SNTP, the > [Format] is not shown in the screen. YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss _[ActiveSyncSrc] > SNTP (2) The ActiveSyncSrc screen shows the active IP address of active SNTP server.
Page 914 6F2T0200 (0.15) The following shows how to operate in this screen. TimeSyncSrc menu Time SyncSrc (Time Synchronization Source) can be changed by the following procedure. Time Sync 10:48 1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER. _TimeSyncSrc SNTP SNTP +>...
Page 915: Display Format
6F2T0200 (0.15) SNTP 10:48 3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit. Server1 0. 0. 0.176 When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press Server2 0. 0. 0. 0 ENTER. Server3 0.
Page 916 6F2T0200 (0.15) Display Format sub-menu is composed of Date_fmt menu, Date_delimiter setting Time_delimiter setting and Sec_delimiter setting. Date format menu (1) Move cursor to the Date_fmt menu and press ENTER. Display Format 10:48 _Date_fmt YYYYMMDD Date_delimiter Time_delimiter (2) Date display format can be selected by moving cursor to the desired format type.
Page 917: Summer Time(Dst)
6F2T0200 (0.15) Second delimiter menu Second delimiter can be switched by the following procedure. (1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER. Display Format 10:48 Date_delimiter Time_delimiter _Sec_delimiter (2) The second delimiter mark is switched. Display Format 10:48 Date_delimiter Time_delimiter _Sec_delimiter...
Page 918 6F2T0200 (0.15) (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set. Summer Time 10:48 IS_UTC_base Start_Month Start_Week The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time. The following procedure is a case of starting weekday setting. Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
Page 919: Test Sub-Menu
6F2T0200 (0.15) Test sub-menu Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED. Test screen The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen. Test 10:48 Test Mode...
Page 920 6F2T0200 (0.15) • GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK) This function is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription information from another IED in Test mode. This function is used for testing in case of bad reception (For example, Validation of Interlock determination). The user can simulate a bad reception condition passively by using two GOOSE Sending Blocks.
Page 921 6F2T0200 (0.15) Binary Input 10:48 Slot#1 > Slot#3 > Figure 12.8-5 Binary input menu Figure 12.8-6 is a case when IO#3 (Slot#03) is selected. Slot#3 10:48 1/19 BIF OP Slot3-BIO1-SET Normal Slot3-BIO2-SET Normal Slot3-BI03-SET Figure 12.8-6 Setting menu for Slot #3 module For example, if the user wishes to simulate binary input circuit #1 (BI1) on the BIO1A module at IO#3 slot, the user can select SLOT3-BI01-SET screen, as shown in Figure 12.8-6).
Page 922 6F2T0200 (0.15) screen shown in Figure 12.8-6); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner similar to that described for BI01. After selecting OP in Figure 12.8-6, use the following screen to start the simulation test. Slot#3 10:48 Press and hold ENTER to operate...
Page 923 6F2T0200 (0.15) Slot#2 10:48 1/19 BO2F OP SLOT2-BO01-SET Normal SLOT2-BO02-SET Normal SLOT2-BO02-SET Figure 12.8-11 Setting menu for Slot #2 module Figure 12.8-12 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2). The procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit. (Refer to Figure 12.8-7 to Figure 12.8-9) SLOT2-BO01-SET 10:48...
Page 924: Mode Change Screen
6F2T0200 (0.15) FSC01-SET 10:48 Normal Figure 12.8-14 Setting menu after selecting “FSC01” • ON: Forcibly set the transmission signal from non-generation to generation • OFF: Forcibly set the transmission signal from generation to non-generation • Normal: Forcible set is not applied. After the selection of the control style (selecting “FSP OP”...
Page 925: Information Sub-Menu
6F2T0200 (0.15) Information sub-menu In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the information are set in a factory. Figure 12.9-1 shows the Information sub-menu. Table 12.9-1 shows detail of information that is displayed in this screen. Information 10:48 [IED TYPE]...
Page 926: Security Setting Sub-Menu
6F2T0200 (0.15) Security setting sub-menu The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords, active or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID. Table 12.10-1 Access control function settings Display Order User ID Guest Setting Test...
Page 927: Control Sub-Menu
6F2T0200 (0.15) Control sub-menu The user can control outdoor devices through LCD screen. Control sub-menu is provided for the operation. The user can manipulate it by pressing Operation keys. Note that Control sub- menu is only applicable when the IED is running in “LOCAL” mode†; an error message is shown on the LCD screen if when the IED is running in “REMOTE”...
Page 928: Cb Operation
6F2T0200 (0.15) CB operation Figure 12.11-2 shows how to open CB (Off position). Control 10:48 _DPOS > DIR mode Double responses? SBO mode Executing screen Output the command DPOS_Dev1 [ ENTER] 10:48 Control execution Control Push O button [CANCEL] 10:48 Waiting for the Select control POS: _DPOS_Dev1...
Page 929 6F2T0200 (0.15) 13 Installation and replacement Contents Pages Unpacking Package Nameplate for hardware Nameplate for software Manufacture setting (In, Vn, Fn, Vdc) BIO and VCT combination LAN and other communication modules LED and Function key labels Wiring work Communication module (LAN etc.) USB connector Caution for storage Handling precautions...
Page 930 6F2T0200 (0.15) Caution for storage If the equipment is not installed immediately, it should be repacked in the original boxes and should be stored in dry and clean condition. Recommended storage condition: - Temperature: 0 degree Celsius to +40 degree Celsius - No condensation Handling precautions CAUTION...
Page 931 6F2T0200 (0.15) Unpack and inspection of hardware and software The user should unpack and check an IED before use. Be in touch with Toshiba at email (www.toshiba-relays.com) for any issues. Opening and inspecting a relay (IED) package Open a relay package and inspect physical damage if any. Ensure that the following items are included in the package.
Page 932 6F2T0200 (0.15) Ordering positions - 1 1 - 1 M 1 - 0 0 - L L - 5 1 - A A 0 VCT3A System frequecy (fn) will be set with the setting Rated current (In) will be set with the seting Figure 13.3-2 How to read VCT type, frequency, and rated current using the code (sample) Note: The user shall set a rated current (In) and a system frequency (fn).
Page 933 6F2T0200 (0.15) Technical description: Case and module slot Note: See Chapter (→p. 507) to find the structure and terminals. For more information about the BI, BO, and BIO circuits, Binary IO module see the section of the same chapter (→p. 533). Communication modules (LAN and others) (iv) Figure 13.3-3 illustrates that communication modules are mounted at C1 and C2.
Page 934 6F2T0200 (0.15) Label (vi) Figure 13.3-6 shows Function and LED labels are attached on the IED. Flange cover LED label Pockets for labels Function keys label Flange cover Figure 13.3-6 Labels attached on IED Note: The GR-TIMES has the label cation tool. See Chapter Engineering tool (→page 583).
Page 935 6F2T0200 (0.15) Wiring work Bus A Bus B BUS VT Bus C Trip coil Ia, Ib, Ic Close coil Motor Wiring for VCT depends on the connection settings [Conn-CT] etc. Programmable BI 100Base-TX 1000Base-T 100Base-TX 1000Base-T BI10 BI11 CLOCK DISUSE IRIG-B BI12 BI13...
Page 936 6F2T0200 (0.15) Table 13.4-1 Wire termination Connecting for Wire termination Wire thickness 1.5mm through 2.5 mm BI / BO / DC supply M3.0 ring tongue with insulation or AWG14 M3.5 ring tongue with insulation 2.5 mm through 5.5mm Protective earth (FG) M5 ring tongue with insulation 5.5 mm or larger...
Page 937 6F2T0200 (0.15) Connection to a local PC via USB or LAN port (ii) Figure 13.4-5 illustrates that the user can connect the local PC with the IED (type B receptacle) using a USB cable. Alternatively, the user can hock up the local PC to IED using a RJ45 cable by LAN port (if available in the IED).
Page 938 6F2T0200 (0.15) 14 Commissioning and maintenance Contents Pages Pages Required test -Test sub-menu structure Cautions Preparations Test operations – Binary output test (BO) Binary input test (BI) Cold load protection test (CLP) Canceling supervision function (AMF) Canceling UVBLK element (UV) Canceling test flag Forcibly signal control GOOSE test (61850)
Page 939 6F2T0200 (0.15) Scope of required test Commissioning tests should be a minimum; it may be required hardware and conjunctive tests. Tests regarding relay and control function may be carried out at the user’s discretion. During the tests, the user can access IED functions through the front panel or using the GR-TIEMS engineering tool.
Page 940 6F2T0200 (0.15) Cautions Safety Precautions CAUTION • The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal. Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded. • When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach the cover provided on top of it.
Page 941 6F2T0200 (0.15) Preparations Test equipment The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests. 1 Three-phase voltage source 2 Single-phase current sources 1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test) 1 DC power supply 3 DC voltmeters 3 AC voltmeters 3 Phase angle meters 2 AC ammeters 1 Time counter, precision timer...
Page 942 6F2T0200 (0.15) Test operations The user can change IED to for Test mode by the operations on the IED front panel with Main/Sub menus, as shown in Figure 14.4-1. Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Main Menu Record Monitoring Setting IO Setting Control Time...
Page 943 6F2T0200 (0.15) GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK) (ii) This is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription information from another IED for Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication the test of bad receptions. See Chapter (→p. 778). Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel) (iii) Test flag in the communication packet will be removed unconditionally, when On is set for setting [Test flag].
Page 944 6F2T0200 (0.15) Motor test (Mot-Test) (vii) Settings [Mot-THM-Test], [Mot-STPH-Reset], [Mot-THM-Ip]=On allows for the user to have Relay application: Motor protection motor tests. See Chapter (→p. 318) Test for BI and BO circuits 14.4.3 Binary input circuit test (SLOT*BIxx-SET) Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual input at a binary input circuit. Binary output circuit test (SLOT*BOxx-SET) (ii) Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual output at a binary input circuit.
Page 945 6F2T0200 (0.15) Setting Setting of Test flag Default Setting item Range Contents Notes setting value TestFlag-EN Off / On Change test flag on Protocol S-TestFlagCancel Off / On Test flag of slave communication protocol is canceled GOSNDBLK Off / On GOOSE publishing block GOSUBBLK Off / On...
Page 946 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal Signal monitoring point ◆ TEST (Function ID: 201301) Element ID Name Description 3100051197 SIM FAULT OUTPUT for Sim.Fault Display 3100001190 TEST MODE Mode of test ◆ Signal monitoring point BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101) Element ID Name Description 3110001198 BI1F OP BI1 forced operate start...
Page 947 6F2T0200 (0.15) Appendix 1 Signal list for common function GRE200 (1,2) - 928 -...
Page 948 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001) Description Name Element ID C0_BIT 8000001220 Constant value 0 expressed with binary in BIT type C1_BIT 8000011220 Constant value 1 expressed with binary in BIT type C0_N8 2000001128 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C1_N8 2000011128 Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit...
Page 949 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001) Description Name Element ID C50_S8 2000321120 Constant value 50 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit C60_S8 20003C1120 Constant value 60 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit C70_S8 2000461120 Constant value 70 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit C80_S8 2000501120...
Page 950 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001) Description Name Element ID C90_S16 21005A1121 Constant value 90 expressed with signed integer in 16 bit C100_S16 2100641121 Constant value 100 expressed with signed integer in 16 bit C0_S32 2200001122 Constant value 0 expressed with signed integer in 32 bit C1_S32 2200011122...
Page 951 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001) Description Name Element ID C0_U8 3000001124 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C1_U8 3000011124 Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C2_U8 3000021124 Constant value 2 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C3_U8 3000031124...
Page 952 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001) Description Name Element ID C4_U16 3100041125 Constant value 4 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit C5_U16 3100051125 Constant value 5 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit C6_U16 3100061125 Constant value 6 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit C7_U16 3100071125...
Page 953 6F2T0200 (0.15) Signal monitoring point ◆ CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001) Description Name Element ID C8_U32 3200081126 Constant value 8 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit C9_U32 3200091126 Constant value 9 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit C10_U32 32000A1126 Constant value 10 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit C11_U32 32000B1126...
Page 954 6F2T0200 (0.15) Appendix 2 Case outline GRE200 (1,2) - 935 -...
Page 955 6F2T0200 (0.15) 1/2 case size 1. Trihedral figure (1/2×19 inches) Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters GRE200 (1,2) - 936 -...
Page 956 6F2T0200 (0.15) 2. Panel cut out figure (1/2×19 inches) 4-Φ5.5 or 4-M4 207±1 219±1 Note: Dimensions shown in millimeter GRE200 (1,2) - 937 -...
Page 957 6F2T0200 (0.15) 1/3 size case 1. Trihedral figure (1/3×19 inches) Note: Dimensions shown in millimeter GRE200 (1,2) - 938 -...
Page 958 6F2T0200 (0.15) 2. Panel cut out figure (1/3×19 inches) 4-Φ5.5 or 4-M4 133±1 145±1 Note: Dimensions shown in millimeter GRE200 (1,2) - 939 -...
Page 959 6F2T0200 (0.15) Appendix 3 Typical external connection 1/3 case with compression terminals 1/2 case with compression terminals Typical external connection diagram GRE200 (1,2) - 940 -...
Page 960 6F2T0200 (0.15) 1／3 case size (VCT3A, MV-BI1, MV-BO1 plus 100Base-TX and IRIG-B) [IO#1] MV-BI1 MV-BO1 VCT3A BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 IRIG-B000 BI15 (-) 18 DISUSE DISUSE DC/DC Fail (-) 20 100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T 1000BASE-T GRE200 (1,2) - 941 -...
Page 961: Mv-Bo1
6F2T0200 (0.15) 1／2 case size (VCT3A, MV-BI1, MV-BO1, MV-BIO1 plus 100Base-TX and IRIG-B) [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] MV-BIO1 MV-BO1 MV-BI1 VCT3A BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 100BASE-TX BI14 1000BASE-T BI15 (-) 18 DC/DC Fail (-) 20 100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T 1000BASE-T (-) 26 GRE200 (1,2) - 942 -...
Page 962: Bo1
6F2T0200 (0.15) Typical external connection diagram for 1/3 case size VCT3A, IO: MV-BI1, MV-BO1 plus RS485 and IRIG-B Busbar Phase A Phase B Phase C Bus VT to Vs (Ia) CB trip (*2) command Secondary (*2)Recommend to (Ib) IO#1 assign by the programmable BO (Ic) Core balance...
Page 963 6F2T0200 (0.15) Typical external connection diagram for 1/2 case size VCT3A, IO: MV-BI1, MV-BO1, MV-BIO1 x 2 plus RS485 and IRIG-B Busbar Phase A Phase B Phase C Bus VT to Vs (Ia) CB trip (*2) command Secondary (*2)Recommend to IO#2 (Ib) IO#1...
Page 964 6F2T0200 (0.15) Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS Document names Pages Provisions MICS Model implementation conformance statement Edition 1 & 2 PICS Protocol implementation conformance statement Edition 1 & 2 PIXIT Protocol implementation extra information for testing Edition 1 & 2 TICS Tissues conformance statement Edition 1 &...
Page 965 6F2T0200 (0.15) (MICS Edition 1) Model Implementation conformance Statement (MICS) for the IEC61850 Ed.1 GRE200 (Multi functional protection IED) (Original document#: 6F2S1948 Ver. 0.0) GRE200 (1,2) - 946 -...
Page 966 6F2T0200 (0.15) (MICS Ed.1) Introduction This model implementation conformance statement is applicable for GRE200 with firmware G2M850-02-A: This MICS document specifies the modeling extensions compared to IEC 61850 Edition 1. For the exact details on the standardized model please compare the ICD substation configuration file: “<W2GRE200xxxx.icd>”, version <D000>.
Page 967 6F2T0200 (0.15) (MICS Edition 2) Model Implementation performance Statement (MICS) of the IEC16850 Ed.2 GRE200 (Multi functional protection IED) (Original document#: 6F2S1949 Ver. 0.0) GRE200 (1,2) - 948 -...
Page 968 6F2T0200 (0.15) (MICS Ed.2) Introduction This model implementation conformance statement is applicable for GRE200 with firmware G2M850-02-A: This MICS document specifies the modeling extensions compared to IEC 61850 Edition 2. For the exact details on the standardized model please compare the ICD substation configuration file: “<T2GRE200xxxx.icd>”, version <D000>.
Page 969 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PICS Editon1 and 2) IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement for GR-200 series IED (Original document#: 6F2S1874 Ver. 0.6) GRE200 (1,2) - 950 -...
Page 970 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PICS Ed.1&Ed.2) Introduction The template of this document is “Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for the IEC 61850 interface in <device>” version 1.6 published by UCA International Users Group in Nov 19, 2015. This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series version equal to or upper than F (G2M850-01-F).
Page 971 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PICS Ed.1&Ed.2) ASCI basic conformance statement The basic conformance statement is defined in Table A.1. Table A.1 – Basic conformance statement Client/ Server/ Value/ Subscriber Publisher Comments Client-Server roles Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION- ⎯ ASSOCIATION) Client side of (TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION- ⎯...
Page 972 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PICS Ed.1&Ed.2) ACSI models conformance statement The ACSI models conformance statement is defined in Table A.2. Table A.2 – ACSI models conformance statement Client/ Server/ Value/ Subscriber Publisher Comments If Server or Client side (B11/12) supported Logical device Logical node Data Data set...
Page 973 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PICS Ed.1&Ed.2) ACSI service conformance statement The ACSI service conformance statement is defined in Table A.3 (depending on the statements in Table A.1). Table A.3 – ACSI service Conformance statement(1/3) Services Client Server Comments TP/MC Server GetServerDirectory (LOGICAL-DEVICE) Application association Associate Abort...
Page 974 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PICS Ed.1&Ed.2) Table A.3 – ACSI service Conformance statement(2/3) Reporting Buffered report control block (BRCB) Report S24-1 data-change (dchg) S24-2 quality-change (qchg) S24- data-update (dupd) GetBRCBValues SetBRCBValues Unbuffered report control block (URCB) Report S27-1 data-change (dchg) S27-2 quality-change (qchg) S27- data-update (dupd) GetURCBValues...
Page 975 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PICS Ed.1&Ed.2) Table A.3 – ACSI service Conformance statement(3/3) Transmission of sampled value model (SVC) Multicast SV SendMSVMessage Multicast Sampled Value Control Block GetMSVCBValues SetMSVCBValues Unicast SV SendUSVMessage Unicast Sampled Value Control Block GetUSVCBValues SetUSVCBValues Control Select SelectWithValue Cancel Operate CommandTermination...
Page 976 Protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850 communication interface in GR-200 series IED Note: The template of this document is “PIXIT template extracted from server test procedures version 1.0 and updated according to TPCL version 1.2.6” published by UCA International Using Group.
Page 977 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) Introduction This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850 interface in G2 Series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series version equal & upper than A(G2M850-02-A). Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC 61850-10.
Page 978 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR ASSOCIATION MODEL Description Value / Clarification Maximum number of clients that can set-up an association simultaneously TCP_KEEPALIVE value. Configurable from 1 to 20 seconds The recommended range is 1..20s (default is 20 seconds) From 10 to 30 seconds 1,2 Lost connection detection time (TCP_KEEPALIVE + 10sec.) - Authentication is not supported yet...
Page 979 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR SERVER MODEL Description Value / Clarification Validity: Good, Invalid, Reserved, Questionable Overflow OutofRange BadReference Oscillatory Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are Failure supported (can be set by server) OldData Inconsistent Inaccurate(OnlyHz) Source: Process Substituted Test OperatorBlocked...
Page 980 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT for Data set model Description Value / Clarification limited internal configuration parameter. This does have What is the maximum number of data elements CreateDataSet service. But any in one data set (compare ICD setting) DataSet can be defined by using engineering tool.
Page 981 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT for Reporting model Description Value / Clarification The supported trigger conditions are integrity (compare PICS) data change quality change data update The supported optional fields are sequence-numberY general interrogation report-time-stamp reason-for-inclusion data- set-name data- reference buffer-overflow entryID conf-...
Page 982 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT for Reporting model (continued) Description Value / Clarification What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how For example, LLN0$ST$Health many reports can be buffered can be stored 408 events. Pre-configured attributes that Deprecated dynamic, compare SCL report settings May the reported data set contain: - structured data objects...
Page 983 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR GOOSE PUBLISH MODEL Description Value / Clarification Can the test (Ed1) / simulation (Ed2) flag in the published GOOSE be set What is the behaviour when the GOOSE publish If the configuration is incorrect, configuration is incorrect the GOOSE isn’t published.
Page 984 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL Description Value / Clarification What elements of a subscribed GOOSE destination MAC address message are checked to decide the message is = as configured valid and the allData values are accepted? If APPID yes, describe the conditions.
Page 985 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued) Description Value / Clarification What is the behavior when a subscribed Refer to Gs3 GOOSE message is out-of-order What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE subscribe quality GOOSE message is duplicated information will become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000...
Page 986 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued) Description Value / Clarification Gs10 1,2 Max number of dataset members <additional items> Are subscribed GOOSE with ndsCom=T GOOSE subscribe quality Accepted. information will become QUESTIONABLE INACCURATE (=1100 0000 0100 0). GOOSE status change is ignored.
Page 987 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL Description Value / Clarification What control models are supported DOns: (compare ICD file enums for Ed2) SBOns: Y DOes: SBOes: Y Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or Fixed dynamic Is TimeActivatedOperate supported (compare Deprecated PICS or SCL) Is “operate-many”...
Page 988 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL(Continued) Description Value / Clarification Which additional cause diagnosis Unknown supported Not-supported Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy Select-failed Invalid-position Position-reached Step-limit Blocked-by-Mode Blocked-by-process Blocked-by-interlocking Blocked-by-synchrocheck Command-already-in-execution Blocked-by-health 1-of-n-control Abortion-by-cancel Time-limit-over Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU) Object-not-selected Edition 1 specific values: Parameter-change-in-execution Edition 2 specific values: Object-already-selected...
Page 989 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL(Continued) Description Value / Clarification How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with DOns, SBOns, DOes: Operate request [Example1] Set orCat as unsupported value -> Cause AddCause as “Not- supported(1)” [Example2] Set ctlCat same as stVal ->...
Page 990 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL(Continued) Description Value / Clarification Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue SBOns: from the same client when the control object is SBOes: already selected (Tissue #334) Ct17 Is for SBOes the internal validation performed Yes for both SelectWithValue and during the SelectWithValue and/or Operate Operate...
Page 991 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION MODEL Description Value / Clarification What time quality bits are supported (may be LeapSecondsKnown set by the IED) ClockFailure ClockNotSynchronized Describe the behavior when the time server(s) On one time server: IED tries to ceases to respond synchronize with another time server.
Page 992 6F2T0200 (0.15) (PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2) PIXIT FOR FILE TRANSFER MODEL Description Value / Clarification What is structure of files and directories Support tree structure Where are the COMTRADE files stored “/COMTRADE/” directory (NOTE) At root directory in IED, the directory “/COMTRADE/” is Hidden.
Page 993 Tissues conformance statement (TICS) of the IEC 61850 Ed.2 communication interface in GR-200 series IED Note: The template of this document is “Test Procedures Change List (TPCL) version 1.2.6 for IEC 61850 Edition 2 server test procedures revision 1.0” published by UCA International Users Group Testing Sub Committee in April 3, 2018.
Page 994 6F2T0200 (0.15) (TICS Ed.2) Introduction This document provides a template for the Tissues conformance statement. According to the UCA IUG QAP the Tissue conformance statement is required to perform a conformance test and is referenced on the certificate. This document is applicable for G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series version equal &...
Page 995 6F2T0200 (0.15) (TICS Ed.2) Mandatory Edition2 Tissues Below tables give an overview of the applicable mandatory Tissues. Part 6 Implemented Description Tissue Y/na Tracking related features FCDA element cannot be a "functionally constrained logical node" Autotransformer modeling SGCB ResvTms ConfDataSet - maxAttributes definition is confusing Log element name bType VisString65 is missing object references...
Page 996 6F2T0200 (0.15) (TICS Ed.2) Mandatory Edition2 Tissues (continued) Part 7-1 Implemented Description Tissue Y/na Data model namespace revision IEC 61850-7-4:2007[A] simulated GOOSE disappears after 1st appearance when 1151 LPHD.Sim = TRUE 1468 Re-use DO from other LN Part 7-2 Implemented Description Tissue Y/na...
Page 997 6F2T0200 (0.15) (TICS Ed.2) Mandatory Edition2 Tissues (continued) Part 7-4 Implemented Description Tissue Y/na mistake in definition of Mod & Beh CDC of ZRRC.LocSta is wrong Same data object name used with different CDC MotStr is used with different CDC in PMMS and SOPM LN classes Remove CycTrMod Enum SI unit for MHYD.Cndct Enum PIDAlg...
Page 998 6F2T0200 (0.15) (TICS Ed.2) Mandatory Edition2 Tissues (continued) Part 8-1 Implemented Description Tissue Y/na Tracking of control (CTS) Fixed-length GOOSE float encoding File dir name length 64 Encoding of Owner attribute 1040 More associate error codes 1178 Select Response+ is non-null value GRE200 (1,2) - 979 -...
Page 999 6F2T0200 (0.15) Appendix 5 Modbus address, exception status, return diagnostic register Default signal lists Pages Function code Address Default mapped signal — Status Default exception status 0x07 Register Default diagnostic register 0x08 GRE200 (1,2) - 980 -...
Page 1000 6F2T0200 (0.15) (Modbus address) Model Modbus GRE200 IED GRE200- Address Signal (Data ID) Name Comment 00000 (Not used) 00001 (Not used) 00002 (Not used) 00003 (Not used) 00004 (Not used) 00005 (Not used) 00006 (Not used) 00007 (Not used) 00008 (Not used) 00999 (Not used)

This manual is also suitable for:

Gre200-1 Gre200-2

Toshiba GR-200 Series Instruction Manual

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for Toshiba GR-200 Series

Summary of Contents for Toshiba GR-200 Series

This manual is also suitable for: